Owner's Manual,2000 Cadillac Eldorado - General …“General Motors of Canada Limited” for...

Free lockout assistance

Free dead-battery assistance

Free out-of-fuel assistance

Free flat-tire change

Emergency towing

1-800-882-1112that provides in an emergency:

1-800-882-1112

Bumper-to-Bumper4-years/50,000 miles (80 000 km)

Limited Warranty

Courtesy Transportation

Deluxe Trip Routing

Every 2000 Eldorado under warranty is backed with the

following services:

i

Litho in U.S.A.Part Number 25695351 A First Edition

© Copyright General Motors Corporation 1999All Rights Reserved

2000 Cadillac EldoradoOwner's Manual

ii

Table of Contents

Keys and Door LocksRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemTrunk ReleaseAutomatic TransmissionParking BrakeWindowsTilt WheelTurn Signal/Multifunction LeverWindshield WipersCruise ControlInterior and Exterior Lamps

MirrorsStorage CompartmentsConvenience NetAccessory Power OutletsOnStar® System (If Equipped)Sunroof (Option)HomeLink® Transmitter (Option)Instrument Panel, Warning Lights and GagesDriver Information CenterMemory and Personalization/Personal Choice Feature

Seats and Seat ControlsSafety Belts

Air Bag SystemsChild Restraints

Section 1

Section 2

Seats and Restraint Systems

Features and Controls

Section 3

Comfort Controls and Audio Systems

Section 4

Your Driving and the Road

Section 5

Table of Contents (cont'd)

Defensive DrivingDrunken DrivingControl of a VehicleBraking

SteeringDriving Tips for Various Road ConditionsLoading Your VehicleTowing a Trailer

Heating and Air ConditioningSetting the Radio ClockRadio/Cassette Player/CD Player

Radio Theft-Deterrent FeatureSteering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)

Hazard Warning FlashersJump StartingTowing Your Vehicle

Engine OverheatingChanging a Flat TireIf You're Stuck

Problems on the Road

iv

FuelChecking Fluids and LubricantsGM Oil Life System™Engine Air Cleaner/FilterBrakesBulb Replacement

Windshield Wiper Blade ReplacementTires and WheelsAppearance CareElectrical System/Fuses and Circuit BreakersCapacities and SpecificationsNormal Maintenance Replacement Parts


Maintenance Schedule

Service and Appearance CareSection 6

Scheduled MaintenanceOwner Checks and ServicesPeriodic Maintenance Inspections

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsMaintenance Records

See separate Maintenance Schedule Booklet

v


Customer Assistance Information

In the Index you will find an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.

Section 7 Customer Satisfaction ProceduresCustomer Assistance OfficesRoadside Assistance and Courtesy Transportation

Warranty Information (See Warranty Manual)Reporting Safety Defects on page 7-10Service Publications

IndexSection 8

Please refer to the last page of this manual for your Service Station Guide

vi

GENERAL MOTORS, GM and the GM Emblem,CADILLAC, the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath and the name ELDORADO are registered trademarks ofGeneral Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the product after that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Cadillac MotorCar Division whenever it appears in this manual.

Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will bethere if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If yousell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the newowner can use it.

We support voluntarytechnician certification.

For Canadian Owners Who Prefer aFrench Language Manual:Aux propriétaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vousprocurer un exemplaire de ce guide en français chezvotre concessionaire ou au:

DGN Marketing Services Ltd.1577 Meyerside Dr.Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1B9

vii

How to Use this ManualMany people read their owner’s manual from beginningto end when they first receive their new vehicle. If youdo this, it will help you learn about the features andcontrols for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsYou will find a number of safety cautions in this book.We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignorethe warning.

CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurtyou or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce thehazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you orothers could be hurt.

You will also find a circlewith a slash through it inthis book. This safetysymbol means “Don’t,”“Don’t do this” or “Don’tlet this happen.”

viii

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this book you will find these notices:

NOTICE:

These mean there is something that coulddamage your vehicle.

In the notice area, we tell you about something that candamage your vehicle. Many times, this damage wouldnot be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTIONand NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words.

You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They usethe same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

ix

For example,these symbolsare used on anoriginal battery:

CAUTIONPOSSIBLE

INJURY

PROTECTEYES BY

SHIELDING

CAUSTICBATTERY

ACID COULDCAUSEBURNS

AVOIDSPARKS OR

FLAMES

SPARK ORFLAMECOULD

EXPLODEBATTERY

These symbolsare importantfor you andyour passengerswhenever yourvehicle isdriven:

DOOR LOCKUNLOCK

FASTENSEAT

BELTS

POWERWINDOW

AIR BAG

These symbolshave to do withyour lamps:

MASTERLIGHTING

SWITCH

TURNSIGNALS

PARKINGLAMPS

HAZARDWARNINGFLASHER

DAYTIMERUNNING

LAMPS

FOG LAMPS

These symbolsare on some ofyour controls:

WINDSHIELDWIPER

WINDSHIELDWASHER

WINDSHIELDDEFROSTER

REARWINDOW

DEFOGGER

VENTILATINGFAN

These symbolsare used onwarning andindicator lights:

ENGINECOOLANT

TEMP

BATTERYCHARGING

SYSTEM

BRAKE

COOLANT

ENGINE OILPRESSURE

ANTI-LOCKBRAKES

Here are someother symbolsyou may see:

FUSE

LIGHTER

HORN

SPEAKER

FUEL

Vehicle SymbolsThese are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.

For

a More Detailed Look at

What's Under the HoodSee Section 6

Tire PressureSee Section 6

Service Station Guide

Oil ViscosityEngine Oil

See Section 6

Engine Oil DipstickSee Section 6 Remote Fuel

Door ReleaseSee Section 6

Premium Fuel Recommended Use unleaded gas only,

91 Octane or higher. See Section 6

Cooling SystemSee Section 5

Hood ReleaseSee Section 6

Windshield Washer Fluid

See Section 6

Spare Tire PressureSee Section 5

Alternate Fuel Door Release

See Section 6

BatterySee Section 6

1-1-1

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can alsolearn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.

1- 2 Seats and Seat Controls1- 6 Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone1- 10 Here Are Questions Many People Ask About

Safety Belts -- and the Answers1- 11 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly1- 11 Driver Position1- 18 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy1- 19 Right Front Passenger Position1- 19 Supplemental Inflatable Restraint

(SIR) System

1- 24 Rear Seat Passengers1- 28 Center Passenger Position1- 29 Children1- 32 Child Restraints1- 44 Larger Children1- 47 Safety Belt Extender1- 47 Checking Your Restraint Systems1- 47 Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash

1-2

Seats and Seat ControlsThis section tells you about the power seats -- how toadjust them, and also about the reclining front seatbacks,lumbar adjustments, head restraints, heated seats andseatback latches.

Power Seats

The power seat controls are located on the outboard sideof the front seat cushion.� Move the front of the control in the direction of the

arrows to adjust the front portion of the cushion upor down.

� Move the rear of the control in the direction of the arrowsto adjust the rear portion of the cushion up or down.

� Lift up or push down on both outer arrows at thesame time to move the entire seat up or down.

� To move the whole seat forward or rearward, slidethe control in the direction of the center arrow.

Power Lumbar Control (Option)

If you have this option, thedriver’s and passenger’sseatback lumbar support canbe adjusted four ways bymoving the single switchlocated on the outboard sideof the seat.

To increase or decrease support, hold the switch forwardor rearward. To move the lumbar up and down, hold theswitch upward or downward.Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, as itmay during long trips, so should the position of yourlumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.If you have the optional personalization package, thepower lumbar control can be programmed for memoryrecall. For more information, see “Memory andPersonalization Features” in the Index.

1-3

Massaging Lumbar (If Equipped)Push the power lumbar control up for half a second toactivate the massage feature. The massage cycle will runfor 10 minutes. The cycle can be interrupted by pushingthe lumbar control down and holding for not more thanhalf a second. The cycle will continue to run even if theignition is turned to OFF. The lumbar support can beadjusted during the massage cycle by moving the switchforward to increase support and rearward to decrease support.

Memory Seat and Mirrors (If Equipped)Automatic seat and mirror movement will occur if theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used toenter the vehicle. The number on the back of thetransmitter corresponds to the 1 or 2 seat and mirrorposition. After the unlock button is pressed on the RKEtransmitter (the ignition must be in LOCK) or when thekey is placed in the ignition, the seat and mirrors willautomatically adjust to the appropriate position.

Automatic seat and mirror movement is programmedthrough the Driver Information Center (DIC) so that thedriver can select whether or not movement will occurusing the RKE transmitter or by placing the ignition keyin the ignition. For programming information, see“Memory and Personalization Features” in the Index.

Heated Front Seat (Option)

The control is located in thecenter console. Move theswitch to LO or HI to turnon the heating elements inthe seat. The LO settingwarms the seatback andcushion until the seatapproximates bodytemperature. The HI settingheats the seat to a slightlyhigher temperature.

A telltale light in the control reminds you that theheating system is in use. The heated seats can only beused when the ignition is turned on.

1-4

Reclining Front Seatbacks

The reclining front seatbackcontrol is located on theoutboard side of each frontseat. Press the controlforward or rearward toadjust the seatback.

But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.

1-5

CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle isin motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckleup, your safety belts can’t do their job whenyou’re reclined like this.The shoulder belt can’t do its job. In a crash youcould go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash thebelt could go up over your abdomen. The beltforces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.This could cause serious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.

Head RestraintsSlide the head restraint up or down so that the top of therestraint is closest to the top of your ears. This positionreduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.

The head restraints tilt forward and rearward also.

Seatback Latches

CAUTION:

If the seatback isn’t locked, it could moveforward in a sudden stop or crash. That couldcause injury to the person sitting there. Alwayspress rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked.

The front seatback foldsforward to let people getinto the rear seat. Theseatback will move backand forth freely unless youcome to a sudden stop, thenit will lock into place.

1-6

The seatback may not fold without some help from youif your vehicle is parked going down a fairly steep hill.In this case, push the seatback toward the rear as you liftthe latch. Then the seatback will fold forward. The latchmust be down for the seat to work properly.

Safety Belts: They’re for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to use safety beltsproperly. It also tells you some things you should not dowith safety belts.

And it explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint(SIR), or air bag system.

CAUTION:

Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t weara safety belt properly. If you are in a crash andyou’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuriescan be much worse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed. In the same crash, you mightnot be if you are buckled up. Always fasten yoursafety belt, and check that your passengers’ beltsare fastened properly too.

CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,people riding in these areas are more likely to beseriously injured or killed. Do not allow people toride in any area of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat and using asafety belt properly.

Your vehicle has a light thatcomes on as a reminder tobuckle up. (See “Safety Belt Reminder Light” in the Index.)

1-7

In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says towear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.

You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have acrash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be soserious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.But most crashes are in between. In many of them,people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walkaway. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up doesmatter ... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels.

1-8

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The riderdoesn’t stop.

1-9

The person keeps going until stopped by something.

In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...

or the instrument panel ...

1-10

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s whysafety belts make such good sense.

Here Are Questions Many People AskAbout Safety Belts -- and the AnswersQ: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an

accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safetybelt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,even if you’re upside down. And your chance ofbeing conscious during and after an accident, soyou can unbuckle and get out, is much greater ifyou are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have towear safety belts?

A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future. But they aresupplemental systems only; so they work withsafety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bagsystem ever offered for sale has required the use ofsafety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,but especially in side and other collisions.

1-11

Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far fromhome, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in anaccident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you and your passengers can be hurt. Being a gooddriver doesn’t protect you from things beyond yourcontrol, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of home. And the greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyAdultsThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know aboutsafety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see the part of this manual called“Children.” Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.

First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems yourvehicle has.

We’ll start with the driver position.

Driver PositionThis part describes the driver’s restraint system.

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)so you can sit up straight.

1-12

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Don’t let it get twisted.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety BeltExtender” at the end of this section.

Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, thisapplies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d beless likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This couldcause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take beltrestraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash.

1-13

Shoulder Belt Tightness Adjustment

Your car has a shoulder belt tightness adjustmentfeature. If the shoulder belt seems too tight, adjust itbefore you begin to drive.

1. Sit well back in the seat.

2. Start pulling the shoulder belt out.

3. Just before it reaches the end, give it a quick pull.

4. Let the belt go back all the way. You should hear aslight clicking sound. If you don’t, the adjustmentfeature won’t set, and you’ll have to start again.

5. Now you can add a small amount of slack. Leanforward slightly, then sit back. If you’ve added morethan 1 inch (25 mm) of slack, pull the shoulder beltout as you did before and start again.

If you move around in the vehicle enough, pull out theshoulder belt, or open your door, the belt will becometight again. If this happens, you can reset it.

1-14

Q: What’s wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearlyas much protection this way.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt istoo loose. In a crash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increase injury. Theshoulder belt should fit against your body. Don’t allow more than 1 inch (25 mm) of slack.

1-15


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your belt into the bucklenearest you.

1-16


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It shouldbe worn over the shoulder at all times.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear theshoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, yourbody would move too far forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head and neck injury.Also, the belt would apply too much force to theribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.You could also severely injure internal organslike your liver or spleen.

1-17


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. Ina crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of thebelt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted,make it straight so it can work properly, or askyour dealer to fix it.

1-18

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of theway. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both thebelt and your vehicle.

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

1-19

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s morelikely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. Forpregnant women, as for anyone, the key to makingsafety belts effective is wearing them properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety belt properly, see “Driver Position” earlier in this section.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same way as the driver’s safety belt -- except for one thing. If you ever pull the lap portion of the belt out all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way and start again.

Supplemental Inflatable Restraint(SIR) SystemThis part explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint(SIR) system or air bag system.

Your vehicle has air bags -- one air bag for the driverand another air bag for the right front passenger.

Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk ofinjury from the force of an inflating air bag. But theseair bags must inflate very quickly to do their job andcomply with federal regulations.

Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system:

CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crash ifyou aren’t wearing your safety belt -- even if youhave air bags. Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to the safetybelts. All air bags are designed to work withsafety belts, but don’t replace them. Air bags are designed to work only in moderate to severecrashes where the front of your vehicle hitssomething. They aren’t designed to inflate at all in rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontalcrashes. And, for unrestrained occupants, air bags may provide less protection in frontalcrashes than more forceful air bags haveprovided in the past. Everyone in your vehicleshould wear a safety belt properly -- whether ornot there’s an air bag for that person.

1-20

CAUTION:

Air bags inflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you’re too close to an inflatingair bag, as you would be if you were leaningforward, it could seriously injure you. Safetybelts help keep you in position before and duringa crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with air bags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to, anyair bag when it inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offerthe best protection for adults, but not for young

CAUTION: (Continued)


children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safetybelt system nor its air bag system is designed forthem. Young children and infants need theprotection that a child restraint system canprovide. Always secure children properly in yourvehicle. To read how, see the part of this manualcalled “Children.”

There is an air bag readinesslight on the instrumentpanel, which shows AIR BAG.

The system checks the air bag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electricalproblem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Indexfor more information.

1-21

How the Air Bag System Works

Where are the air bags?

The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrumentpanel on the passenger’s side.

1-22

CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and an airbag, the bag might not inflate properly or itmight force the object into that person. The pathof an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’tput anything between an occupant and an airbag, and don’t attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering.

When should an air bag inflate?

An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severefrontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a wallthat doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is about9 to 15 mph (14 to 24 km/h). The threshold level canvary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that it canbe somewhat above or below this range. If your vehiclestrikes something that will move or deform, such as aparked car, the threshold level will be higher. The air bagis not designed to inflate in rollovers, side impacts or rearimpacts, because inflation would not help the occupant.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air bagshould have inflated simply because of the damage to avehicle or because of what the repair costs were. Inflationis determined by the angle of the impact and how quicklythe vehicle slows down in frontal or near-frontal impacts.

What makes an air bag inflate?

In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the right front passenger.

How does an air bag restrain?

In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel orthe instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force ofthe impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags wouldnot help you in many types of collisions, includingrollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarilybecause an occupant’s motion is not toward those airbags. Air bags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and then only inmoderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions.

1-23

What will you see after an air bag inflates?

After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quicklythat some people may not even realize the air baginflated. Some components of the air bag module -- thesteering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or theinstrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag -- will be hot for a short time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm, butnot too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dustcoming from vents in the deflated air bags. Air baginflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or frombeing able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop peoplefrom leaving the vehicle.

CAUTION:

When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or otherbreathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.If you have breathing problems but can’t get outof the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then getfresh air by opening a window or door.

Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlockthe doors and turn the interior lamps on when the airbags inflate (if battery power is available). You can lockthe doors again and turn the interior lamps off by usingthe door lock and interior lamp controls.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger air bag.

� Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After theyinflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bagsystem. If you don’t get them, the air bag systemwon’t be there to help protect you in another crash.A new system will include air bag modules andpossibly other parts. The service manual for yourvehicle covers the need to replace other parts.

� Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing anddiagnostic module, which records information aboutthe air bag system. The module records informationabout the readiness of the system, when the systemcommands air bag inflation and driver’s safety beltusage at deployment. Some modules also recordspeed, engine rpm, brake and throttle data.

� Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag system. Improper service can mean that your air bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer for service.

1-24

NOTICE:

If you damage the covering for the driver’s airbag, it may not work properly. You may have toreplace the air bag module. Do not open or breakthe air bag covering.

Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped VehicleAir bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.There are parts of the air bag system in several placesaround your vehicle. You don’t want the system toinflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual have information aboutservicing your vehicle and the air bag system. Topurchase a service manual, see “Service and OwnerPublications” in the Index.

CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key isturned off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still inflate during improper service. Youcan be injured if you are close to an air bag whenit inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They areprobably part of the air bag system. Be sure tofollow proper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you is qualifiedto do so.

The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.

Rear Seat PassengersIt’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rearseat are hurt more often in crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrownout of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike othersin the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

1-25

Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions

Lap-Shoulder Belt

The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulderbelts. Here’s how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Don’t let it get twisted.

The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt acrossyou very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go backslightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

1-26

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt thelatch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.

If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety BeltExtender” at the end of this section. Make sure therelease button on the buckle is positioned so youwould be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly ifyou ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckleend of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.

1-27

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug onthe hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this appliesforce to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likelyto slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash,or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt istoo loose. In a crash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increase injury. Theshoulder belt should fit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

1-28

Center Passenger Position Lap Belt

When you sit in the center seating position, you have alap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the beltlonger, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.

1-29

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown untilthe belt is snug.

Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lappart of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough,see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.

Make sure the release button on the buckle is positionedso you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.

ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! That includesinfants and all children smaller than adult size. Neitherthe distance traveled nor the age and size of the travelerchanges the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.In fact, the law in every state in the United States and inevery Canadian province says children up to some agemust be restrained while in a vehicle.

Smaller Children and Babies

CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to, anyair bag when it inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offerthe best protection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safetybelt system nor its air bag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need theprotection that a child restraint system canprovide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle.

1-30

CAUTION:

Smaller children and babies should always berestrained in a child or infant restraint. Theinstructions for the restraint will say whether it isthe right type and size for your child. A veryyoung child’s hip bones are so small that aregular belt might not stay low on the hips, as itshould. Instead, the belt will likely be over thechild’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would applyforce right on the child’s abdomen, which couldcause serious or fatal injuries. So, be sure thatany child small enough for one is always properlyrestrained in a child or infant restraint.

Infants need complete support, including support for the head and neck. This is necessary because an infant’sneck is weak and its head weighs so much comparedwith the rest of its body. In a frontal crash, an infant in arear-facing restraint settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across the strongest part of theinfant’s body, the back and shoulders. A baby should besecured in an appropriate infant restraint. This is soimportant that many hospitals today won’t release anewborn infant to its parents unless there is an infantrestraint available for the baby’s first trip in a motor vehicle.

1-31

CAUTION:

Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in avehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much -- until acrash. During a crash a baby will become soheavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash



at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) babywill suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force onyour arms. The baby would be almost impossibleto hold.Secure the baby in an infant restraint.

1-32

Child RestraintsEvery time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have protection provided by appropriate restraints.

Q: What are the different types of add-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints are available in four basictypes. When selecting a child restraint, take intoconsideration not only the child’s weight and size,but also whether or not the restraint will becompatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used.

An infant car bed (A) is a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle. It’s an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. With an infant car bed,make sure that the infant’s head rests toward thecenter of the vehicle.

1-33

A rear-facing infant restraint (B) positions an infantto face the rear of the vehicle. Rear-facing infantrestraints are designed for infants of up to about 20 lbs. (9 kg) and about one year of age. This typeof restraint faces the rear so that the infant’s head,neck and body can have the support they need in a frontal crash. Some infant seats come in two parts -- the base stays secured in the vehicleand the seat part is removable.

1-34

A forward-facing child restraint (C-E) positions achild upright to face forward in the vehicle. These forward-facing restraints are designed tohelp protect children who are from 20 to 40 lbs. (9 to 18 kg) and about 26 to 40 inches (66 to 102 cm) in height, or up to around four years of age. One type, a convertible restraint, isdesigned to be used either as a rear-facing infantseat or a forward-facing child seat.

1-35

A booster seat (F) is designed for children who are about 40 to 60 lbs., or even up to 80 lbs. (18 to 27 kg, or even up to 36 kg), and about fourto eight years of age. A booster seat is designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.Booster seats with shields use lap-only belts;however, booster seats without shields uselap-shoulder belts. Booster seats can also help a child to see out the window.

When choosing a child restraint, be sure the childrestraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You mayfind these instructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system inyour vehicle, but the child also has to be secured withinthe restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.The instructions that come with the infant or childrestraint will show you how to do that. Both the owner’smanual and the child restraint instructions are important,so if either one of these is not available, obtain areplacement copy from the manufacturer.

1-36

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We atGeneral Motors therefore recommend that you put yourchild restraint in the rear seat. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the front passenger seat. Here’s why:

CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s air bag inflates. This is because theback of the rear-facing child restraint would bevery close to the inflating air bag. Always securea rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.



You may secure a forward-facing child restraintin the right front seat, but before you do, alwaysmove the front passenger seat as far back as itwill go. It’s better to secure the child restraint ina rear seat.

Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can movearound in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any childrestraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.

1-37

Top Strap

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top strap, and that the strap beanchored. In the United States, some child restraints alsohave a top strap. If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be anchored.

Your vehicle has top strap anchors already installed for therear seating positions. You’ll find them behind the rear seaton the filler panel.

In order to get to a bracket, you’ll have to open the trim cover.

Anchor the top strap to this bracket. Once you have thetop strap anchored, you’ll be ready to secure the childrestraint itself.

1-38

Securing a Child Restraint in a RearOutside Seat Position

You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with thechild restraint. Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

1. Put the restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.

If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face orneck, put it behind the child restraint.

1-39

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

4. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt whileyou push down on the child restraint. If you’re usinga forward-facing child restraint, you may find ithelpful to use your knee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

5. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety beltwill move freely again and be ready to work for an adultor larger child passenger.

1-40

Securing a Child Restraint in the CenterRear Seat Position

You’ll be using the lap belt. Be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as theinstructions say.

See the earlier part about the top strap if the childrestraint has one.

1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latchplate and pulling it along the belt.


3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around therestraint. The child restraint instructions will showyou how.

1-41


5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push down on the child restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find ithelpful to use your knee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.


To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or largerchild passenger.

1-42

Securing a Child Restraint in the RightFront Seat Position

Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Neverput a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:

CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s air bag inflates. This is because theback of the rear-facing child restraint would bevery close to the inflating air bag. Always securea rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.

Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure aforward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.

You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with thechild restraint. Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag, always move the seat as far back as it will gobefore securing a forward-facing child restraint. (See “Seats” in the Index.)


3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face orneck, put it behind the child restraint.

1-43


5. Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock.

1-44

6. To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into theretractor while you push down on the child restraint.You may find it helpful to use your knee to pushdown on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.


To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety beltwill move freely again and be ready to work for an adultor larger child passenger.

Larger Children

Children who have outgrown child restraints shouldwear the vehicle’s safety belts.

If you have the choice, a child should sit next to awindow so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt andget the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.

1-45

Accident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use thesafety belts properly.

� Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out ina crash.

� Children who aren’t buckled up can strike otherpeople who are.

CAUTION:

Never do this.Here two children are wearing the same belt. The belt can’t properly spread the impact forces.In a crash, the two children can be crushedtogether and seriously injured. A belt must beused by only one person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,but the child is so small that the shoulder belt isvery close to the child’s face or neck?

A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, butbe sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’sshoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper bodywould have the restraint that belts provide. If thechild is so small that the shoulder belt is still veryclose to the child’s face or neck, you might want toplace the child in the center seat position, the onethat has only a lap belt.

1-46

CAUTION:

Never do this.Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behindthe child. If the child wears the belt in this way, ina crash the child might slide under the belt. Thebelt’s force would then be applied right on thechild’s abdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, just touchingthe child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’spelvic bones in a crash.

1-47

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, yourdealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you goin to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so theextender will be long enough for you. The extender willbe just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle thatyou choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use itonly for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach itto the regular safety belt.

Checking Your Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminder lightand all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors andanchorages are working properly. Look for any otherloose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you seeanything that might keep a safety belt system fromdoing its job, have it repaired.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, andhave them repaired or replaced. (The air bag systemdoes not need regular maintenance.)

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a CrashIf you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if wornduring a more severe crash, then you need new belts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collisiondamage also may mean you will need to have safety beltor seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairsmay be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used atthe time of the collision.

If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bagsystem parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section.

2-2-1

Section 2 Features and Controls

Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything isworking properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.

2-2 Keys2-4 Door Locks2-6 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System2-9 Trunk2-11 Theft2-12 Theft-Deterrent System2-14 PASS-Key� II2-15 New Vehicle “Break-In”2-16 Ignition Positions2-17 Starting Your Engine2-18 Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)2-19 Automatic Transaxle Operation2-23 Parking Brake2-25 Shifting Into PARK (P)2-26 Shifting Out of PARK (P)2-27 Parking Over Things That Burn2-28 Engine Exhaust

2-28 Running Your Engine While You’re Parked2-29 Windows2-30 Tilt Wheel2-30 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever2-37 Exterior Lamps2-41 Interior Lamps2-42 Mirrors2-46 Storage Compartments2-49 Sun Visors2-49 Cellular Telephone (Option)2-50 Sunroof (Option)2-51 HomeLink� Transmitter (Option)2-54 The Instrument Panel -- Your

Information System2-58 Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators2-68 Driver Information Center (DIC)

2-2

Keys

CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignitionkey is dangerous for many reasons. A child orothers could be badly injured or even killed.

They could operate the power windows or othercontrols or even make the vehicle move. If theyturned the ignition to RUN and moved the shiftlever out of PARK (P), that would release theparking brake. Don’t leave the keys in a vehiclewith children.

2-3

Ignition Key Door/Locks Key

The square key is for the ignition only. It has a resistorpellet which is part of the vehicle’s PASS-Key� II system.

The oval key is for the doors and all other locks.

When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer removes theplug from the door key. The plug has a code on it thattells the dealer or a qualified locksmith how to makeextra keys. The ignition key has a bar code tag attachedto it rather than a knock out plug. Your dealer orqualified locksmith can make extra ignition keys byreading the bar code tag.

There are 15 alternative ignition PASS-Key� II blanksto help discourage theft. Keep the bar code tag and thedoor key plugs in a safe place. If you lose your keys,you will be able to have new ones made using the plugor bar code tag.

NOTICE:

Your vehicle has a number of new features thatcan help prevent theft. You can have a lot oftrouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lockyour keys inside and you may have to damageyour vehicle to get in. Be sure you have extra keys.

2-4

Door Locks

CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.

Passengers -- especially children -- can easilyopen the doors and fall out. When a door islocked, the inside handle won’t open it.

Outsiders can easily enter through an unlockeddoor when you slow down or stop your vehicle.This may not be so obvious: You increase thechance of being thrown out of the vehicle in acrash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety beltsproperly, lock your doors, and you will be farbetter off whenever you drive your vehicle.

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.From the outside, use either the door key or the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

If your vehicle is equipped with the theft-deterrent system,you must unlock the doors with the key or remote keylessentry transmitter to avoid setting off the alarm.

Slide the manual lock lever down to lock the door fromthe inside. To unlock the door, slide the lock lever up.

Central Door Unlocking SystemYour vehicle will have this feature if it is equipped withthe theft-deterrent system. When unlocking either door,you can also unlock the other door by holding the key inthe turned position for a few seconds or by quicklyturning the door key twice in the lock cylinder.

2-5

Power Door Locks

Press the power door lock switch to lock or unlock bothdoors at once.

Automatic Door LocksClose your doors and turn on the ignition. Every timeyou move the shift lever out of PARK (P), both doorswill lock. The doors will unlock every time you stop thevehicle and move the shift lever back into PARK (P). If someone needs to get out while your vehicle is not inPARK (P), have that person use the manual or power

door lock. When the door is closed again, it will not lockautomatically. Use the manual or power door lock tolock the door again. If you need to lock the doors beforeshifting out of PARK (P), use the manual or power door lock.

Programmable Automatic Door Locks (If Equipped)With the ignition in RUN, the door locks can beprogrammed through prompts displayed by the DriverInformation Center (DIC). These prompts allow thedriver to choose various lock settings. For programminginformation, see “Memory and PersonalizationFeatures” in the Index.

Anti-Lockout FeatureLeaving your key in any ignition position with eitherdoor open will disable the use of the power door lockswitches as well as the lock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter. If you close the doors, you can lockthem using the remote keyless entry transmitter. It isalways recommended that you remove your ignition keywhen locking your vehicle.

The anti-lockout feature can be overridden by holdingthe driver’s power door lock switch for three seconds or longer.

2-6

Leaving Your VehicleIf you are leaving the vehicle, open the door, set thelocks from the inside, get out and close the door.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemWith this feature, you canlock and unlock the doors,unlock the trunk, open thefuel door and turn on yourvehicle’s interior lampsfrom about 10 feet (3 m)away using the remotekeyless entry transmittersupplied with your vehicle.

Your remote keyless entry system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) thisdevice may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by other than anauthorized service facility could void authorization touse this equipment.

The average range of this system is about 10 feet (3 m).At times you may notice a decrease in range. This isnormal for any remote keyless entry transmitter. If thetransmitter does not work or if you have to stand closerto your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

� Check the distance. You may be too far from yourvehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainyor snowy weather.

� Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may beblocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left orright, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.

� Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See the instructions that follow.

� If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or aqualified technician for service.

2-7

Operation When you press this button to unlock the driver’s

door, the parking lamps on your vehicle will blink twice.(You can program your vehicle so the parking lampswill not flash. For more information, see “Lock/UnlockConfirmation” in the Index.) Pressing it again withinfive seconds will unlock the other doors. Pressing thisbutton will also disarm the theft-deterrent system (if equipped) and turn on the interior lamps at night.

When you press this button to lock the doors, theparking lamps will blink once. (You can program yourvehicle so the parking lamps will not flash. For moreinformation, see “Lock/Unlock Confirmation” in theIndex.) This also arms the theft-deterrent system (if equipped).

Press this symbol to open the trunk. (The VALET lockout button must be off.)

Press this button to open the fuel door. (The VALET lockout button must be off.)

The remote keyless entry transmitter can also be used to recall the memory seats for up to two drivers. For more information, see “Memory Seat and Mirrors”in the Index.

Matching Transmitter(s) To Your VehicleEach remote keyless entry transmitter is coded toprevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can bepurchased through your dealer. Once your dealer hascoded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will notunlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have only up tofour transmitters matched to it.

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your remote keylessentry transmitter should last about two years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’twork at the normal range in any location. If you have toget close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,it’s probably time to change the battery.

NOTICE:

When replacing the battery, use care not to touchany of the circuitry. Static from your bodytransferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter.

2-8

1. Use the round end of the door key or a coin to pryopen the transmitter.

2. Once the transmitter is separated, use a pencil (or similar object) to remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.

3. Remove and replace the battery. Insert the newbattery as the instructions under the cover indicate.Do not use a metal object.

4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sureno moisture can enter.

5. Resynchronize the transmitter. See instructions under“Resynchronization” following.

6. Check the operation of the transmitter.

2-9

ResynchronizationPressing the remote keyless entry transmitter buttonsnumerous times (approximately 250 times) out of thevehicle’s operating range may cause the transmitter not to work. Replacing the battery and pressing thetransmitter buttons out of range will also cause thetransmitter not to work. If only the fuel door buttonworks, the transmitter needs to be resynchronized to thereceiver. Do this by pressing and holding both theLOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter forabout eight seconds. You must be within range of the vehicle.

Once the transmitter has been resynchronized, the hornwill chirp and the exterior lamps will flash once. Thesystem should now operate properly. See your dealer for service if your transmitter doesn’t work properly.

Trunk

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lidopen because carbon monoxide (CO) gas cancome into your vehicle. You can’t see or smellCO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.If you must drive with the trunk lid open or ifelectrical wiring or other cable connections mustpass through the seal between the body and thetrunk lid:� Make sure all other windows are shut.� Turn the fan on your heating or cooling

system to its highest speed with the settingon AUTO and the temperature between65�F (18�C) and 85�F (29�C). That willforce outside air into your vehicle. See“Comfort Controls” in the Index.

� If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all the way.

See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.

2-10

Trunk Lock Release

To use this feature, your vehicle must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and theVALET lockout button must be in the OFFposition. Press the TRUNKbutton, located above theradio on the DriverInformation Center (DIC),to open the trunk.

You can also press the trunk button on the remote keyless entry transmitter to access the trunk compartment.

Trunk Lid Automatic Pull-Down Feature

CAUTION:

Your car may have an automatic pull-downfeature that helps close the trunk electronically.Your fingers can be trapped under the trunk lidas it goes down. Your fingers could be injured,and you would need someone to help you freethem. Keep your fingers away from the trunk lidas you close it and as it is going down.

With the automatic pull-down feature, you never have toslam the trunk lid in order to close the trunk. Instead,gently lower the trunk lid until it is nearly shut -- theautomatic pull-down unit will take over and lock thetrunk firmly.

2-11

A. Trunk Lid

B. Lever

If for some reason the trunk lid (A) will not close, it maybe because the trunk pull-down unit was accidentallybumped. Even though the trunk lid remains open, themotor from the pull-down unit has already cycled down.If this happens, press the lever (B) on the trunk lid. Thepull-down unit motor will reset itself, allowing the trunklid to close when lowered.

TheftVehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrentfeatures, we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help.

Key in the IgnitionIf you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s aneasy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- sodon’t do it.

When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your keyfrom the ignition and take it with you. Always do this.Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will yourignition and transaxle. And remember to lock the doors.

Parking at NightPark in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock yourvehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.

2-12

Parking LotsIf you park in a lot where someone will be watchingyour vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys.But what if you have to leave your ignition key?

� If possible, park in a busy, well lit area.

� Put your valuables in a storage area, like your trunkor glove box. Be sure to close and lock the storage area.

� Close all windows.

� Move the trunk release lockout switch to ON.

� Lock the glove box.

� Lock all the doors except the driver’s.

� Then take the door key and remote keyless entrytransmitter with you.

Theft-Deterrent SystemIf the ignition is off andeither door is open, theSECURITY light will flash,reminding you to activatethe system.

The light will also flash if the battery has beendisconnected and reconnected.

To activate the theft-deterrent system:

1. Open the door.

2. Lock the door using the power door lock or theremote keyless entry transmitter. The SECURITYlight should come on and stay on.

3. Close both doors. The SECURITY light should gooff within about 30 seconds.

The horn will sound and the lamps will flash for about30 seconds when a door or the trunk is opened withoutthe key or the remote keyless entry transmitter. The hornalso sounds if the locks are damaged.

2-13

Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate ifyou lock a door with a key or use the manual door lock.It activates only if you use a power door lock switch orthe remote keyless entry transmitter.

To avoid activating the alarm by accident:

� Always unlock a door with a key or use the remotekeyless entry transmitter. (Pressing the unlock buttonon the remote keyless entry transmitter disables thetheft-deterrent system.) Unlocking a door any otherway will activate the alarm. Cycling the ignitionwithout disarming the theft-deterrent system willalso activate the alarm.

� The vehicle should be locked with the door key afterthe doors are closed if you don’t want to activate thetheft-deterrent system.

If you activate the alarm by accident, unlock either doorwith your key. You can also turn off the alarm by usingthe unlock button of the remote keyless entrytransmitter. The alarm won’t stop if you try to unlock adoor any other way.

Testing the Alarm1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window, then

get out of the vehicle, keeping the door open.

2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door open, lockthe vehicle using the power door lock or the remotekeyless entry transmitter and close the door. Wait 30 seconds until the SECURITY light goes off.

3. Reach in and unlock the door using the manual lockand open the door. The horn will sound and theheadlamps will flash.

If the alarm does not sound when it should, check to seeif the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown. Toreplace the fuse, see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in theIndex. If the fuse does not need to be replaced, you mayneed to have your vehicle serviced.

To reduce the possibility of theft, always activate thetheft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.

2-14

Valet Lockout Button

Pressing the VALETlockout button, locatedinside the glove box, to ON will disable the useof the power trunk, fueldoor and garage dooropeners. Pressing thisbutton again will makethese features reusable.Locking the glove box withthe door key will also helpto secure your vehicle.

The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can’t beused to open the trunk or fuel door if the VALETlockout button is pressed in.

PASS-Key� IIYour vehicle is equippedwith the PASS-Key IItheft-deterrent system.PASS-Key II is a passivesystem. The system isarmed when the key isremoved from the ignition.

PASS-Key II uses a resistor pellet in the ignition keythat is read by the system in your vehicle. If the keyresistor matches the code stored in the vehicle system,the vehicle’s fuel and starting systems will be enabled. If an incorrect key is used, the vehicle’s fuel and startingsystems are disabled for three minutes. Additionalattempts during this lockout period will not start the car,even with the correct key.

2-15

If the engine does not start and the STARTINGDISABLED REMOVE KEY message is displayed inthe Driver Information Center, your key should bechecked for damage. Starting may be attempted with anundamaged key immediately. See your dealer or alocksmith for key service.

If the STARTING DISABLE REMOVE KEY andWAIT 3 MINUTES messages are displayed, the keyshould be cleaned. After three minutes, try again. A START CAR message will appear at this time. If the engine still does not start, wait three minutes andtry a duplicate key. At this time, fuses should be checked(see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index). If the engine does not start with the duplicate key, yourvehicle needs service. See your dealer for service.

If the THEFT SYSTEM PROBLEM, CAR MAY NOTSTART message is displayed during vehicle operation, a fault has been detected in the system. This means thePASS-Key II system is disabled and is not protecting the vehicle. The vehicle usually restarts. See your dealerfor service.

If an ignition key is lost or damaged, see your dealer ora locksmith to have a new key made.

New Vehicle “Break-In”

NOTICE:

Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate“break -in.” But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines:

� Don’t drive at any one speed -- fast or slow -- for the first 500 miles (805 km).Don’t make full -throttle starts.

� Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timeyour new brake linings aren’t yet brokenin. Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline everytime you get new brake linings.

� Don’t tow a trailer during break -in. See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index formore information.

2-16

Ignition Positions

With the ignition key in the ignition, you can turn theswitch to five different positions.

ACCESSORY (A): This position lets you use thingslike the radio, windshield wipers, power windows andsunroof (option) when the engine is off. To get intoACCESSORY, push in the key and turn it toward you.The steering wheel will remain locked, just as it wasbefore you inserted the key. Once you turn the key toACCESSORY, be sure to then turn it to LOCK. If youleave your key in ACCESSORY when the engine isturned off, your battery will discharge prematurely.

LOCK (B): Before you put the key in, the ignition willbe in LOCK. This is the only position from which youcan remove the key. This position locks the ignition,steering wheel and transaxle. It’s a theft-deterrent feature.

NOTICE:

If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’tturn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn thesteering wheel left and right while you turn thekey hard. But turn the key only with your hand.Using a tool to force it could break the key or theignition switch. If none of this works, then yourvehicle needs service.

OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine butstill turn the steering wheel. It doesn’t lock the steeringwheel like LOCK does. Use OFF if you must have yourvehicle in motion while the engine is off (for example, if your vehicle is being pushed).

RUN (D): This is the position for driving.

START (E): This position starts the engine.

2-17

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)The following accessories on your vehicle may be usedfor up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned fromRUN to OFF, and then to LOCK:

� Radio

� Power Windows

� Sunroof

Power to these accessories stops after 10 minutes or ifeither door is opened. If you want power for another 10 minutes, turn the ignition key to RUN, to OFF andthen to LOCK.

NOTICE:

When using RAP, always leave your key in LOCK.If you leave your key in any other position thanLOCK, your battery will discharge prematurely.

Starting Your EngineMove your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s asafety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,use NEUTRAL (N) only.

NOTICE:

Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle ismoving. If you do, you could damage thetransaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when yourvehicle is stopped.

1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn yourignition key to START. When the engine starts, letgo of the key. The idle speed will go down as yourengine gets warm.

NOTICE:

Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heatcan damage your starter motor. Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoiddraining your battery or damaging your starter.

2-18

2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key inSTART for about three seconds at a time until yourengine starts. Wait about 15 seconds between eachtry to help avoid draining your battery or damagingyour starter.

3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but thenstops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to thefloor and holding it there as you hold the key inSTART for about three seconds. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, do the same thing.

NOTICE:

Your engine is designed to work with theelectronics in your vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you could change the waythe engine operates. Before adding electricalequipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,your engine might not perform properly.If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see the part of this manual that tells how to do itwithout damaging your vehicle. See “TowingYour Vehicle” in the Index.

Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)

A. Engine Oil Dipstick Location

B. Engine Coolant Heater Cord

C. Transaxle Dipstick/Fluid Fill Location

In very cold weather, 0�F (-18�C) or colder, the enginecoolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting andbetter fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum offour hours prior to starting your vehicle.

2-19

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.

The electrical cord is located on the driver’s side ofthe engine, behind the transaxle dipstick/fluid filllocation (C) and next to the engine.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outletcould cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord could overheat and causea fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug thecord into a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cordrated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug andstore the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heater pluggedin? The answer depends on the outside temperature, thekind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead oftrying to list everything here, we ask that you contactyour dealer in the area where you’ll be parking yourvehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for thatparticular area.

Automatic Transaxle OperationThere are several differentpositions for the shift lever.

PARK (P): This position locks the front wheels. It’s thebest position to use when you start the engine becauseyour vehicle can’t move easily.

2-20

CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if theshift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine isrunning unless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.You or others could be injured. To be sure yourvehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairlylevel ground, always set your parking brake andmove the shift lever to PARK (P).

See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer”in the Index.

Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) beforestarting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatictransaxle shift lock control system. You have to fullyapply your regular brakes before you can shift fromPARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN. If youcannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shiftlever -- push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then move the shiftlever into the gear you wish. See “Shifting Out of PARK (P)” in the Index.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

NOTICE:

Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle ismoving forward could damage your transaxle.Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehiclehas stopped.

Also use this gear to rock your vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice or sand without damaging yourtransaxle. See “If You’re Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice orSnow” in the Index for additional information.

2-21

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine doesn’tconnect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, useNEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.

CAUTION:

Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) whileyour engine is “racing” (running at high speed) isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on thebrake pedal, your vehicle could move veryrapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.

NOTICE:

Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting outof PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engineracing isn’t covered by your warranty.

OVERDRIVE (�): This position is for normal driving.If you need more power for passing, and you’re:

� Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push theaccelerator pedal about halfway down.

� Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push theaccelerator all the way down.

The transaxle will shift down to the next gear andhave more power.

NOTICE:

If your vehicle seems to start up rather slowly, or if it doesn’t seem to shift gears as youaccelerate, something may be wrong with atransaxle system sensor. If you drive very far that way, your vehicle can be damaged. So if thishappens, have your vehicle serviced right away.Until then, you can use SECOND (2) when youare driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h) andOVERDRIVE (�) for higher speeds.

2-22

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normaldriving, however, it offers more power and lower fueleconomy than OVERDRIVE (�).

Here are examples for using THIRD (3) instead ofOVERDRIVE (�):

� When driving on hilly, winding roads.

� When towing a trailer, so there is less shiftingbetween gears.

� When going down a steep hill.

SECOND (2): This position gives you more power thanThird (3). You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can helpcontrol your speed as you go down steep mountainroads, but then you would also want to use your brakesoff and on.

NOTICE:

Don’t shift into SECOND (2) unless you are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can damage your engine.

FIRST (1): This position gives you even more powerthan SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. (If the shift lever is put inFIRST (1), the transaxle won’t shift into gear until thevehicle is going slowly enough.)

NOTICE:

If your front wheels can’t rotate, don’t try todrive. This might happen if you were stuck invery deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object. You could damage your transaxle.Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t holdyour vehicle there with only the acceleratorpedal. This could cause overheating and damagethe transaxle. Use your brakes to hold yourvehicle in position on a hill.

2-23

Parking BrakeHold the regular brakepedal down with your rightfoot and push down theparking brake pedal withyour left foot to set theparking brake.

If the ignition is on, the BRAKE indicator light shouldcome on. If it doesn’t, you need to have your vehicle serviced.

If the parking brake has not been fully released and you try to drive with the parking brake on, the BRAKE indicator light comes on and stays on. See “Brake System Warning and Park Brake IndicatorLight” in the Index for more information.

When you move out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), if the engine is running, the parking brake shouldrelease. If it doesn’t, you can manually release theparking brake.

CAUTION:

Always shift to PARK (P) before pulling themanual release lever. If your hand or arm is inthe way of the pedal you could be hurt. The pedalsprings back quickly. Keep your hand and armaway when you use the manual release lever.

Be sure to turn off the ignition and put the vehicle inPARK (P) before manually releasing the brake.

2-24

Reach under the driver’s side of the instrument paneland pull on the manual release lever, which is locatedabove the parking brake pedal. If the parking brake doesnot release, you should either drive to the nearest servicestation or have your vehicle towed.

NOTICE:

Driving with the parking brake on can causeyour rear brakes to overheat. You may have toreplace them and you could also damage otherparts of your vehicle.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see“Towing a Trailer” in the Index. This section showswhat to do first to keep the trailer from moving.

2-25

Shifting Into PARK (P)

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle ifthe shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, use thesteps that follow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

Console Shift Lever1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:

� Push the lever all the way toward the front ofyour vehicle.

� With your right foot still holding the brake pedaldown, set the parking brake.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you canleave your vehicle with the ignition key in yourhand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

2-26

Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running. Your vehicle could movesuddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. And, if youleave the vehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You or others couldbe injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with theengine running unless you have to.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and yourparking brake is firmly set before you leave it. Afteryou’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold theregular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move theshift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling ittoward you. If you can, it means that the shift leverwasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift yourtransaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in thetransaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift leverout of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To preventtorque lock, set the parking brake and then shift intoPARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat. Tofind out how, see “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to have anothervehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of thepressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so youcan pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of PARK (P)

CAUTION:

Before shifting out of PARK (P) you must fullyapply your regular brakes. Your vehicle can roll.If you have left the engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or others could beinjured. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

2-27

Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lockcontrol system. You have to fully apply your regularbrakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when theignition is in RUN. See “Automatic Transaxle” in the Index.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), try applyingpressure to the brakes and push the shift lever all theway into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application.Then move the shift lever into the gear you want. If youever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift out ofPARK (P), try this:

1. Turn the ignition key to OFF. Open and close thedriver’s door to turn off the Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) feature.

2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.

3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).

4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear you want.

5. Take your vehicle to an authorized service center assoon as you can.

Parking Over Things That Burn

CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaustparts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t parkover papers, leaves, dry grass or other things thatcan burn.

2-28

Engine Exhaust

CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gascarbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see orsmell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:� Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.� Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.� Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.� Your vehicle was damaged when driving over

high points on the road or over road debris.� Repairs weren’t done correctly.� Your vehicle or exhaust system had been

modified improperly.If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle:� Drive it only with all the windows down to

blow out any CO; and� Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

Running Your Engine While You’re ParkedIt’s better not to park with the engine running. But if youever have to, here are some things to know.

CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate control systemoff could allow dangerous exhaust into yourvehicle (see the earlier Caution under “Engine Exhaust”).Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even ifthe fan switch is at the highest setting. One placethis can happen is a garage. Exhaust -- with CO -- can come in easily. NEVER park in agarage with the engine running.Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. (See “Blizzard” in the Index.)

2-29

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle ifthe shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine isrunning unless you have to. If you’ve left theengine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.You or others could be injured. To be sure yourvehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairlylevel ground, always set your parking brake afteryou move the shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’tmove. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.

If you are parking on a hill and if you’re pulling atrailer, also see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

WindowsPower Windows

The controls are locatednear each window. Press thecontrol forward to raise thewindow and press rearwardto lower the window.

The second rearward position on the driver’s controloperates the express-down window feature.

Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).When you stop your vehicle and turn the ignition key to OFF, you can still use your power windows. See “Retained Accessory Power” in the Index for more information.

2-30

Express-Down Window

This feature is present on the driver’s power window. Pressing the control rearward into the second position then releasing it will lower the window completely. If you want to stop the window as it is lowering, press the control forward.

The first position on the power window control operatesthe driver’s power window in the non-express mode.

HornThe horn can be sounded by pressing on the center ofthe steering wheel pad.

Tilt Wheel

Tilt steering allows you to adjust the steering wheelbefore you drive. Raising the steering wheel to thehighest level gives your legs more room when you enterand exit the vehicle.

Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever located on theoutboard side of the steering column toward you to tilt thewheel. Adjust the steering wheel to a comfortable positionand then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.

Turn Signal/Multifunction LeverTurn and Lane Change SignalsTo signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.The lever returns automatically when the turn is complete.

An arrow located on theinstrument panel cluster willflash in the direction of theturn or lane change.

Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash tosignal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane changeis complete. The lever returns when it’s released.

2-31

If the turn signal is left on, a warning chime will sound and the Driver Information Center (DIC) willdisplay TURN SIGNAL ON (after driving about 1 mile (1.6 km/h)) to remind you to turn it off.

Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turn orlane change may be caused by a burned-out signal bulb.Other drivers won’t see the turn signal.

Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possibleaccidents. Check the fuse (see “Fuses and CircuitBreakers” in the Index) and for burned-out bulbs if thearrow fails to work when signaling a turn.

Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer

This light located on theinstrument panel panel willbe on when the high beamheadlamps are in use.

Pull the turn signal lever all the way toward you andthen release it to change the headlamps from low beamto high or from high beam to low.

Flash-To-PassThis lets you use the high-beam headlamps to signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass.

Pull the turn signal lever toward you to use. When you do:

� If the headlamps are either off or in the DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL) mode, the high-beamheadlamps will turn on. They’ll stay on as long asyou hold the lever there. Release the lever to turnthem off.

� If the headlamps are on low beam, they will shift tohigh beam and stay there. Pull the lever toward youto return to low beam.

� If the headlamps are on high beam, they will switchto low beam. To return to high beam, pull the levertoward you.

2-32

Windshield Wipers

WIPER: Turn the band on the turn signal lever tocontrol the wipers.

MIST: Turn the band toward you and then release it fora single wiping cycle. For more cycles, hold the band onMIST longer.

LO or HI: Turn the band away from you to either LO(low speed) or to HI (high speed), depending on thewiper speed you want.

DELAY: You can set the wiper speed for a long or shortdelay between wipes with this setting. Turn the band tothe DELAY position. The closer you turn it to LO, theshorter the delay.

OFF: Turn the band to OFF to turn off the wipers.

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper bladesbefore using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them. If the blades do becomedamaged, get new blades or blade inserts.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools. Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

Rainsense� Wipers (ETC Only)

This moisture sensor is mounted on the interiorpassenger’s side of the windshield behind the rearviewmirror and is used to automatically operate the wipersby monitoring the amount of moisture that is on the windshield.

2-33

The Rainsense system can be activated by turning thewiper stalk to one of the five sensitivity levels within theAUTO DELAY area. The AUTO DELAY positionclosest to OFF is the lowest sensitivity setting. Thisallows more water to collect on the windshield betweenwipes. Turning the stalk away from you to the otherAUTO DELAY settings increases the sensitivity of thesystem and frequency of wipes. A single wipe will occur each time you turn the wiper stalk to a highersensitivity level. An initial wipe occurs when you turnthe ignition on as a reminder that Rainsense is active.The windshield wipers also remain in a “high park”position (when the wipers are stopped on the windshieldand are not in the normal park position), even when theignition is turned off.

The Rainsense wipers operate in a delay mode as well as a continuous low or high speed depending on theamount of moisture and the sensitivity level. The MISTand “wash” cycles operate as normal and are notaffected by the Rainsense function.

NOTICE:

The wipers must be turned off when goingthrough a car wash to avoid damage.

It is important to note that the Rainsense wiping feature(AUTO DELAY) can be overridden at any time bymanually changing the wiper control to LO or HI speed.

If you ever need to replace the windshield, make sure itis Rainsense compatible.

Windshield Washer

CAUTION:

In freezing weather, don’t use your washer untilthe windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on the windshield, blockingyour vision.

At the top of the turn signal/multifunction lever there isa paddle with the word PUSH on it. To spray washerfluid on the windshield, press and release this paddle.The wipers will clear the windshield and either stop orreturn to your preset speed. For more washer cycles,press and hold the paddle.

LOW WASHER FLUID will be displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) when the washer fluid reachesa low level.

2-34

Cruise Control

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can help on long trips.Cruise control does not work at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).

Cruise control shuts off when you apply your brakes.

CAUTION:

� Cruise control can be dangerous where youcan’t drive safely at a steady speed. So,don’t use your cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

� Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fast changesin tire traction can cause needless wheelspinning, and you could lose control. Don’tuse cruise control on slippery roads.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the tractioncontrol system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage. (See “TractionControl System” in the Index.) When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruisecontrol back on.

2-35

Setting Cruise Control

CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control switch on whenyou’re not using cruise, you might hit a buttonand go into cruise when you don’t want to. Youcould be startled and even lose control. Keep thecruise control switch off until you want to usecruise control.

1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.

2. Accelerate to the speed you want.

3. Press the SET CRUISE button at the end of the leverand release it. The CRUISE ENGAGED messagewill display on the Driver Information Center (DIC).

4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

Resuming a Set Speed

Setting the cruise control at a desired speed and thenapplying the brake will end the cruise function.

Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,you can move the cruise control switch from ON to R/A(Resume/Accelerate) for about half a second to reset.This returns you to your desired preset speed. TheDriver Information Center (DIC) will display theCRUISE ENGAGED message again.

If you hold the switch at R/A longer than half a second,the vehicle will accelerate until you release the switch orapply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’thold the switch at R/A.

2-36

Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control

There are two ways to go to a higher speed:

� Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.Push the button at the end of the lever and thenrelease the button and the accelerator pedal. You’llnow cruise at the higher speed.

� Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it thereuntil you reach a desired speed and then release theswitch. (To increase your speed in very small amounts,move the switch to R/A. Each time you do this, yourvehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.)

The accelerate feature will only work after you have set thecruise control speed by pushing the SET CRUISE button.

Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control

There are two ways to reduce your speed while usingcruise control:

� Push in the button at the end of the lever until youreach a desired lower speed, then release it. ACRUISE ENGAGED message will then display inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).

� To slow down in very small amounts, push thebutton for less than half a second. Each time you dothis, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slowdown to the cruise control speed you set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well your cruise control will work on hills dependsupon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.When going up steep hills, you may have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When goingdownhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gearto keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brakesor downshifting into FIRST (1) takes you out of cruisecontrol. Many drivers find this to be too much troubleand don’t use cruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise Control

There are two ways to end cruise control:

� Step lightly on the brake pedal.

� Move the CRUISE switch to OFF.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed memory is erased when youturn off the cruise control or the ignition.

2-37

Exterior LampsThe control located on theleft side of the instrumentpanel controls these lamp systems:

� Headlamps

� Taillamps

� Parking Lamps

� Sidemarker Lamps

� License Plate Lamp

� Underhood Lamp

� Fog Lamps

� Instrument Panel Lights

� Interior Courtesy Lamps

Instrument panel backlighting will activate wheneverthe lamps or lights are turned on.

Parking LampsPull the exterior lamp control knob out to the first stop toturn on the parking as well as the taillamps, sidemarkerlamps and instrument panel lights. Push the control knoball the way back in to turn the lamps and lights off.

HeadlampsPull the exterior lamp control knob out all the way toturn on the headlamps. Push the control knob all the wayback in to turn the headlamps off.

Wiper-Activated Headlamps

This feature activates the headlamps and parking lampsafter the windshield wipers have been in use forapproximately 20 seconds.

In order to operate the wiper-activated headlamps, the Twilight Sentinel� must be turned on. This feature lights the way in poor weather and it also makesyour vehicle more visible to other drivers. If thewiper-activated headlamps are on, and the ignitionswitch is turned off, the wiper-activated headlamps willimmediately turn off.

The wiper-activated headlamps will deactivate if youturn off the Twilight Sentinel or if the windshield wipershave been turned off for a period of one or two seconds.

2-38

Lamps On ReminderIf the manual headlamp control is activated, you willhear a warning chime if you open either door whileleaving the lamps on. An exception to this is whenyou’re using Twilight Sentinel.

Daytime Running LampsDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier forothers to see the front of your vehicle during the day.DRL can be helpful in many different drivingconditions, but they can be especially helpful in theshort periods after dawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will make the high-beam headlampscome on at reduced brightness when:

� The ignition is on,

� the headlamp switch is off and

� the transaxle is not in PARK (P).

When DRL are on, only your high-beam headlamps (at reduced brightness) will be on. No other exteriorlamps such as the parking lamps, taillamps, etc. will beon when the DRL are being used. Your instrument panel won’t be lit up either.

When the Twilight Sentinel switch is on and it’s darkenough outside, the high-beam headlamps (at reducedintensity) will turn off and normal low-beam headlampoperation will occur. When the Twilight Sentinel switchis on and it’s bright enough outside, the regular lampswill go off, and the high-beam headlamps at reducedbrightness will take over for the DRL.

If it’s dark enough outside and the Twilight Sentinelcontrol is off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED messagewill display on the Driver Information Center (DIC).This message informs the driver that turning on theexterior lamps is recommended even though the DRLare still illuminated (it’s become dark enough outside torequire the headlamps and/or other exterior lamps).Turning on the Twilight Sentinel, the headlamp switchor the fog lamp switch will remove the HEADLAMPSSUGGESTED message.

To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, turn off theTwilight Sentinel switch and shift the transaxle intoPARK (P). Placing your vehicle in PARK (P) disablesthe DRL. The DRL will stay off until you shift out of PARK (P).

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regularheadlamp system when you need it.

2-39

Fog Lamps

Use the fog lamps for bettervision in foggy or mistyconditions. When you pressthe fog lamp button, a smallindicator light will tell youthat the fog lamps and theparking lamps are on. Pressthe button again to turnthem off.

If you turn on the high-beam headlamps, the fog lampswill turn off. They’ll turn back on again when youswitch to low-beam headlamps.

When the Twilight Sentinel is on and the fog lampswitch is activated, the fog lamps will remain on as wellas the headlamps and parking lamps.

Cornering LampsThe cornering lamps come on when the headlamps orparking lamps are on and you signal a turn. Theyprovide more light for cornering.

Twilight Sentinel�

This control is located nextto the exterior lamp controlknob. It automatically turns the lamps on and off by sensing how dark it is outside.

To operate the Twilight Sentinel, leave the exterior lampcontrol knob off and move the TWILIGHT control toany position but OFF.

If you move the control all the way to the right, thelamps will remain on for approximately three minutesafter the ignition has been turned to OFF or LOCK. If you move the control so it is just on, the lamps will go off quickly when you turn the ignition out of RUN.You can adjust the delay time from only a few secondsto three minutes.

2-40

If it’s dark enough outside and the Twilight Sentinelcontrol is off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED messagewill display on the Driver Information Center (DIC).This message informs the driver that turning on theexterior lamps is recommended (it’s become darkenough outside to require the headlamps and/or otherexterior lamps). Turning on the Twilight Sentinel, the headlamps or the fog lamps will remove theHEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message.

Light Sensor

The light sensor for the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)and the Twilight Sentinel is located in the center of thefront defogger grille. If you cover the sensor, it will read“dark” and the lamps will come on.

Exterior Lighting Battery SaverIf the manual parking lamp control has been left on, theexterior lamps will turn off approximately 10 minutesafter the ignition is turned to LOCK or ACCESSORY.This protects draining the battery in case you haveaccidentally left the headlamps or parking lamps on. If you need to purposely leave the lamps on for morethan 10 minutes with the ignition in LOCK orACCESSORY, turn the exterior lamps control knob off and then back on. To delay the lamps from turningoff, see “Twilight Sentinel” in the Index.

2-41

Interior LampsInstrument Panel Intensity/Brightness ControlThe digital displays automatically dim when it becomesdark outside and your lights are on. When it’s dark, thebrightness control can be manually adjusted by turningthe exterior lamps control knob counterclockwise to dimand clockwise to brighten the lighting. The digitaldisplays automatically brighten when it becomes lightoutside, although backlighting will remain active at theselected brightness as long as the lights are on.

Illuminated EntryThe illuminated entry system turns on the courtesylamps and the backlighting to the door controls and tothe exterior lamps control knob when a door is openedor if you press a remote keyless entry transmitter button.Since the illuminated entry system has a photocell, thismeans that it must be dark outside in order for thecourtesy lamps or backlighting to turn on. The courtesylamps turn off approximately 20 seconds after the lastdoor is closed or after the ignition is turned to RUN.

Parade DimmingThis feature prohibits the dimming of the instrumentpanel lights during daylight while the headlamps are on.This feature operates with the light sensor for theTwilight Sentinel and is fully automatic. When the lightsensor reads darkness outside, the instrument panellights can be adjusted by turning the exterior lampscontrol knob counterclockwise to dim and clockwise tobrighten lighting. Backlighting to the instrument panelwill turn on, regardless of light conditions.

Reading LampsThe reading lamps are either located in the headliner orabove the windows if you have a sunroof. To turn themon, turn the exterior lamps control knob all the wayclockwise. These lamps and the interior courtesy lampsautomatically come on when either door is opened and itis dark outside. For manual operation, press the buttonto turn them on. Press it again to turn them off.

If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shutoff 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.

2-42

Inadvertent Power Battery SaverThis feature is designed to protect your vehicle’s batteryagainst drainage from the interior lamps, trunk lamp,glove box lamp, cigarette lighters or the garage dooropener. When the ignition is turned off, the power to these features will automatically turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes if a new car has 15 miles (24 km) or less). Power will be restored for an additional10 minutes if either door is opened, the trunk is openedor the courtesy lamps are turned on.

Storage Mode PersonalizationThis feature is for long-term use and must beprogrammed through the Driver Information Center(DIC) while the ignition is in RUN. Storage modepersonalization protects the battery by placing yourvehicle in a storage mode so that the radio, amplifiers,instrument panel cluster and remote keyless entry will not drain the battery over a long period of time. For programming information, see “Memory andPersonalization Features” in the Index.

MirrorsElectrochromic Day/Night Rearview Mirrorwith Compass

Your vehicle has an electrochromic inside rearviewmirror with a compass.

When set in the MIRROR position, this mirrorautomatically changes to reduce glare from headlampsbehind you.

2-43

The mirror also includes an eight-point compass displayin the upper right corner of the mirror face. When on,the compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle is driven.

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similarmaterial dampened with glass cleaner. Do not sprayglass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause theliquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Mirror Operation

The right button located at the bottom of the mirrorturns the electrochromic mirror on and off. To turn onthe automatic dimming feature, press MIRROR. To turn off automatic dimming, press MIRROR again.The green indicator light will be illuminated when thisfeature is active.

Compass Operation

Press the COMPASS button once to turn the compass on or off.

When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the compass will show two character boxes forapproximately two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display the compass heading.

If, after two seconds, the display does not show acompass heading (“N” for North, for example), there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass. Such interference may be caused by amagnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic item.

Compass Calibration

If the letter “C” appears in the compass display, the mirror may need calibration.

The mirror can be calibrated in one of two ways:

� Drive the vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or lessuntil the display reads a direction, or

� Drive the vehicle on your everyday routine.

2-44

Compass Variance

The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensatefor compass variance if you live outside zone eight.Under certain circumstances, as during a long distancecross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust forcompass variance. Compass variance is the differencebetween earth’s magnetic north and true geographicnorth. If not adjusted to account for compass variance,your compass could give false readings.

To adjust for compass variance:

1. Use the COMPASS side of the button located at thebottom of the mirror. Press and hold COMPASSuntil a zone number appears in the display.

2. Find your current location and variance zone numberon the following zone map. 3. Press COMPASS on the bottom of the mirror until

the new zone number appears in the display. Afteryou stop pressing the button, the display will show a“C” in the direction display within a few seconds.(This is the automatic calibration mode -- you’llneed to drive in a circle to calibrate the mirror. See“Compass Calibration” listed previously.)

2-45

Power Remote Control Mirror (Heated)

Your vehicle has an electricmirror control located onthe driver’s door armrest.

Move the R/L switch in the middle of the control tochoose the right (passenger’s side) or left (driver’s side)mirror. To adjust the mirror, push the arrow control inthe direction you want the mirror to go. Adjust eachmirror so you can see the side of your vehicle and thearea behind your vehicle.

The mirrors can also be programmed for personalization ifyou have the optional memory package. For moreinformation, see “Memory Seat and Mirrors” in the Index.

To activate the heated mirrors, press the rear windowdefogger button. See “Rear Window Defogger” in the Index.

Driver’s Outside Auto-Dimming Rearview MirrorOnly the driver’s side outside mirror will adjust for the glare of headlamps behind you. This feature iscontrolled by the on and off settings on theelectrochromic mirror. See “Electrochromic Day/NightRearview Mirror with Compass” in the Index.

Curb View Assist Mirror (If Equipped)If your vehicle is equipped with memory mirrors, it willalso be equipped with the curb view assist mirrorfeature. This feature will cause the passenger’s mirror totilt when the vehicle is moving in REVERSE (R). Thisfeature may be useful in allowing you to view the curbwhen you are parallel parking (selected/programmedthrough personalization on the DIC).

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and afive second delay has occurred, the passenger’s mirrorwill return to its original position. If further adjustmentis needed after the mirror is tilted, the mirror switch maybe used. The mirror then returns to its original position.

2-46

Convex Outside MirrorYour passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’ssurface is curved so you can see more from the driver’sseat. This mirror does not have a dimming feature.

CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (like othervehicles) look farther away than they really are.If you cut too sharply into the right lane, youcould hit a vehicle on your right. Check yourinside mirror or glance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

Storage CompartmentsGlove BoxThe glove box is located in front of the passenger’s seat.To lock the glove box door, insert the oval key into thelock cylinder and turn it clockwise. Turn the keycounterclockwise to unlock the door.

Overhead Console

Sunglasses Storage Compartment

This feature is on vehicles without the optional sunroof.To gain access to this compartment, which is locateddirectly above the inside rearview mirror in theheadliner, push up on the compartment and the storagearea will open.

Map PocketThe map/storage pockets are located on each front door as well as on the passenger’s and driver’s front seatbacks.

2-47

Center Console Storage

The console includes a storage compartment for CDs ortapes and an optional phone, an armrest and a cupholder.The cupholder can be opened by pressing on the surfacepanel located in front of the armrest. Close the lid to secure.

The console may have a lock. To lock the console, insertthe oval key into the lock cylinder and turn it clockwise.Turn the key counterclockwise to unlock the door.

Rear Storage Armrest (If Equipped)Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear seat armrestwhich includes an open storage compartment and a dualcupholder that unfolds for use. To open, lift the frontedge. (This feature is available on vehicles with leatherinteriors only.)

Convenience NetThe convenience net is located inside the back wall ofthe trunk. Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind thenet. It can help keep them from falling over during sharpturns or quick starts and stops.

The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store them in thetrunk as far forward as you can. When not using the net,hook the net to the tabs securing it to the sill plate.

2-48

Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter

NOTICE:

Don’t put papers or other flammable items into your ashtrays. Hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignite them, causing a damaging fire.

Front AshtrayThe front ashtray is located below the climate controlsystem. To open, press on the lower edge of the cover.

Rear AshtrayThe rear ashtray is located on the armrest; to use, lift the lid.

Cigarette LighterThe cigarette lighter is located near the ashtray. Press itall the way in and release. It will pop back out by itselfwhen it’s ready to light. You may also have a lighterlocated at the rear seat air outlet.

Power to the cigarette lighter will shut off 10 minutesafter the ignition is turned off. This helps to preventbattery drainage. For more information, see “InadvertentPower Battery Saver” in the Index.

NOTICE:

Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your handwhile it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able toback away from the heating element when it’sready. That can make it overheat, damaging thelighter and the heating element.

2-49

Sun VisorsSwing down the visor to block out glare. It can also bedetached from the center mount and moved to the side.The driver’s sun visor is also equipped with a storageflap that can be used for maps or toll tickets.

Lighted Visor Vanity MirrorMove the sun visor down and lift the cover to see themirror. Move the slide switch up or down to brighten ordim the lamp.

Cellular Telephone (Option)Your vehicle has been prewired for dealer installation ofa Cadillac dual-mode (analog/digital) cellular telephone.A fixed mobile or a portable hand-held system isavailable. Either system has steering wheel telephonecontrols and information output through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). Voice activation andhands-free operation are standard features. For moreinformation, contact your dealer. A user’s guide isprovided with the telephone.

OnStar� System (If Equipped)OnStar is a vehicle communications service. Thefollowing services are available through subscriptionwith OnStar and are available 24 hours a day:

Emergency Services

� Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment

� Theft Notification and Stolen Vehicle Tracking

� Roadside Assistance with Location

� Remote Diagnostics

� OnStar MED-NET

� Accident Assist

Convenience Services

� Remote Door Unlock

� Route Support

� Concierge Services

� Ride Assist

A complete user’s guide is provided with the OnStarSystem. For more information contact OnStar at 1-888-ONSTAR7.

2-50

Assist HandlesA handle, located on each side pillar, can be used whengetting out of your vehicle.

Garment HooksFor your convenience, a garment hook is attached to thecasing around the reading lamps in the rear of thevehicle. To use, push the lower edge of the hook.

Floor MatsYour vehicle is equipped with rubber-backed front andrear floor mats. Keep them clean by vacuuming andusing a spot cleaner, if necessary. Do not machine wash.

Sunroof (Option)

The switch, located on the overhead console, only workswhen the ignition is on or when the Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active.

Press the switch rearward and release to express-open theglass panel and sunshade. The sunshade can also beopened by hand. If you want to stop the roof in a partiallyopened position, press the switch in either direction. Press and release the switch again to open it fully.

Press and hold the switch forward to close the glasspanel. The sunshade can only be closed by hand.

To open the vent, press the switch forward when theglass panel is closed. Open the sunshade by hand. To close the vent, press the switch rearward.

2-51

HomeLink� Transmitter (Option)

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation of the device.

Changes and modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorization touse this equipment.

Programming the HomeLink TransmitterDo not use the HomeLink Transmitter with any garagedoor opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”safety feature. This includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garagedoor you are programming.Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off whileprogramming the transmitter. Follow these steps toprogram up to three channels:1. If you have previously programmed a transmitter

channel, proceed to Step 2. Otherwise, hold downthe two outside buttons on the HomeLinkTransmitter until the indicator light begins to flashrapidly (after 20 seconds). Then release the buttons.This procedure initializes the memory and erases anyprevious settings for all three channels.

2. Decide which one of the three channels you want toprogram. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitterabout 2 to 5 inches (5 to 13) away from the surfaceof the HomeLink Transmitter so that you can still seethe indicator light.

3. Using both hands, press the hand-held transmitterbutton and the desired button on the HomeLinkTransmitter. Continue to press both buttons through Step 4.

2-52

4. Hold down both buttons until you see the indicatorlight on the HomeLink Transmitter flash slowly andthen rapidly. The rapid flashing indicates that theHomeLink Transmitter has been programmed.Release both buttons once the indicator light starts toflash rapidly.

If you have trouble programming the HomeLinkTransmitter, make sure that you have followed thedirections exactly as described. The HomeLinkTransmitter may not work with older garage door openersthat do not meet current Federal Consumer SafetyStandards. If you cannot program the transmitter afterrepeated attempts, refer to “Rolling Code Programming”later in this section or contact the HomeLink Transmittermanufacturer at 1-800-355-3515.

Be sure to keep the original hand-held transmitter in case you need to erase and reprogram the HomeLink Transmitter.

Note to Canadian Owners: During programming, the hand-held transmitter may automatically stoptransmitting after one or two seconds. In this case, youshould press and re-press the button on the hand-heldtransmitter every two seconds without ever releasing thebutton on the HomeLink Transmitter. Release bothbuttons when the indicator light on the HomeLinkTransmitter begins to flash rapidly.

Operating the HomeLink TransmitterPress and release the appropriate button on theHomeLink Transmitter. The indicator light comes onwhile the signal is being transmitted.

The HomeLink Transmitter is disabled when theVALET lockout button inside the glove box is activated.For more information, see “Valet Lockout Button” in the Index.

If the hand-held transmitter appears to program theHomeLink Transmitter but does not open your garagedoor, and if the garage door opener was manufacturedafter 1996, the garage door opener may have a “rollingcode” system. A rolling code system changes the codeof the garage door opener every time you open or closethe garage door.

To determine if you have this system, press the button onthe HomeLink Transmitter that you have programmedalready. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkTransmitter flashes rapidly for two seconds and thenturns solid, the garage door opener has a rolling codesystem. In a rolling code system, the garage door motorhead unit must be trained to the HomeLink Transmitter.

2-53

“Rolling Code” Programming (If Equipped)If you have not previously programmed the hand-held transmitter to the HomeLink Transmitter, see “Programming the HomeLink Transmitter” listed previously. If you have completed this programming already, you now need to train the garage door opener motor head unit to recognize the HomeLink Transmitter. Refer to your garage door opener owner’s manual for the proper transmitter training procedure for your garage door opener brand.1. Find the training button on the garage door opener

motor head unit. The exact location and color of thebutton may vary by garage door opener brand. If youhave difficulty finding the training button, refer toyour garage door opener owner’s manual.

2. Press the training button on the garage door openermotor head unit.Note: Following this step, you have 30 seconds tostart Step 3.

3. Return to the HomeLink Transmitter in your vehicleand firmly press and release the HomeLinkTransmitter button you have already programmed fortwo to three seconds. Press and release the buttonagain (you may need to do this step up to threetimes) to make sure that the HomeLink Transmitterhas been trained to the garage door opener motorhead unit. Check that the training was successful.

The garage door opener should now recognize theHomeLink Transmitter. You may either use theHomeLink Transmitter or the hand-held transmitter toopen the garage door.

If after following these instructions, you still haveproblems training the garage door opener, contact the HomeLink Transmitter manufacturer at 1-800-355-3515.

Erasing ChannelsTo erase all three programmed channels, hold down thetwo outside buttons until the indicator light begins toflash (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons.

AccessoriesAccessories for the HomeLink Transmitter are availablefrom the manufacturer of the unit. If you would likeadditional information, please call 1-800-355-3515.

2-54

The Instrument Panel -- Your Information System

2-55

The main components of the instrument panel are:

A. Air Outlets

B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

C. Instrument Panel Cluster

D. Radio (Audio System)

E. Driver Information Center Control Buttons

F. Lamp Controls

G. HVAC Steering Wheel Controls (or Cellular Telephone Controls, If Equipped)

H. Hood Release

I. Horn

J. Audio Steering Wheel Controls

K. Shift Lever

L. Climate Control System

M. Glove Box

2-56

Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know howfast you’re going, how much fuel you’re using and many of the other things you’ll need to know to drive safely and economically.

United States version shown, Canada similar

2-57

Speedometer and OdometerThe speedometer lets you see your speed in both milesper hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Theodometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven,in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers(used in Canada).

You may wonder what happens if a vehicle has to have anew odometer installed. The new one may read thecorrect mileage. This is because your vehicle’s computerhas stored the mileage in memory.

Trip OdometerBy pressing this button, you can tell how far you’vetraveled since you last set the trip odometer back to zero.

For information on resetting this button, see “DICControls and Displays” in the Index.

English/Metric Display

Press the INFO (SKIP) button until ENGLISH/METRICRESET displays and then press INFO RESET (NO) to select.

Other readings such as temperature, fuel and trip odometeralso go back and forth between English and metric.

Vehicle Speed Limiter

This feature prevents your vehicle from exceedingspeeds that the tires are not rated for. When thishappens, the engine’s fuel supply is shut off. When thevehicle speed slows, the fuel supply will come on again.

TachometerThis gage indicates theengine speed in revolutionsper minute (RPM).

NOTICE:

Do not operate the engine with the tachometer inthe red area or engine damage may occur.

2-58

Engine Speed Limiter

This feature prevents the engine from operating at toomany revolutions per minute (RPM). When the engine’sRPM are critically high, the fuel supply to the engine is shut off. When the engine speed slows, the fuel supply will come on again. This helps prevent damageto the engine.

Warning Lights, Gages and IndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gages thatmay be on your vehicle. The pictures will help youlocate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that something iswrong before it becomes serious enough to cause anexpensive repair or replacement. Paying attention toyour warning lights and gages could also save you orothers from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As youwill see in the details on the next few pages, somewarning lights come on briefly when you start theengine just to let you know they’re working. If you arefamiliar with this section, you should not be alarmedwhen this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problemwith one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages andwarning lights work together to let you know whenthere’s a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays onwhen you are driving, or when one of the gages showsthere may be a problem, check the section that tells youwhat to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and evendangerous. So please get to know your warning lightsand gages. They’re a big help.

Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center that works along with the warning lights and gages. See “Driver Information Center” in the Index.

2-59

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime willcome on for about eight seconds to remind people tofasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt isalready buckled.

The safety belt light willalso come on and stay onfor about 20 seconds, then it will flash for about70 seconds.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chimenor the light will come on.

Air Bag Readiness LightThere is an air bag readiness light on the instrumentpanel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks theair bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The lighttells you if there is an electrical problem. The systemcheck includes the air bag sensors, the air bag modules,the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.For more information on the air bag system, see “Air Bag” in the Index.

This light will come onwhen you start your vehicle,and it will flash for a fewseconds. Then the lightshould go out. This meansthe system is ready.

If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start thevehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air bagsystem may not work properly. Have your vehicleserviced right away.

2-60

CAUTION:

If the air bag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle, it means the air bag systemmay not be working properly. The air bags inyour vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or theycould even inflate without a crash. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, have your vehicleserviced right away if the air bag readiness lightstays on after you start your vehicle.

The air bag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If thelight doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will beready to warn you if there is a problem.

Charging System Indicator Light

When you turn the ignitionkey to RUN, this light willcome on briefly to showthat the generator andbattery charging systems are working.

If this light stays on, you need service and you shouldtake your vehicle to the dealer at once. To save yourbattery until you get there, turn off all accessories.

Brake System Warning and Park BrakeIndicator LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided intotwo parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part canstill work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.Have your brake system inspected right away.

2-61

This light should come onbriefly when you turn theignition key to RUN If itdoesn’t come on then, haveit fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off theroad and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal isharder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle”in the Index.)

CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be working properlyif the brake system warning light is on. Drivingwith the brake system warning light on can leadto an accident. If the light is still on after you’vepulled off the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warning lightwill also come on when you set your parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’trelease fully. If it stays on after your parking brake isfully released, it means you have a brake problem.

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light

With the anti-lock brakesystem, the light(s) willcome on when you startyour engine and may stayon for several seconds.That’s normal.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. Or, if thelight comes on when you’re driving, stop as soon aspossible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engineagain to reset the system. If the light still stays on, orcomes on again while you’re driving, your vehicle needsservice. If the regular brake system warning light isn’ton, you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti-lockbrakes. If the regular brake system warning light is alsoon, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s aproblem with your regular brakes. See “Brake SystemWarning Light” earlier in this section.

2-62

The anti-lock brake system warning light should comeon briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If thelight doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will beready to warn you if there is a problem.

Traction Control System Warning Light

This warning light shouldcome on briefly as you startthe engine.

If the warning light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem. If it stays on, orcomes on when you’re driving, there may be a problem with your traction control system and your vehicle may need service. When this warning light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

The traction control system warning light may come onfor the following:

� If there’s a brake system problem that is specificallyrelated to traction control, the traction control systemwill turn off and the warning light will come on.

� If the traction control system is affected by anengine-related problem, the system will turn off andthe warning light will come on.

If the traction control system warning light comes onand stays on for an extended period of time when thesystem is turned on, your vehicle needs service.

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light

This light tells you that theengine has overheated. Youshould stop your vehicleand turn the engine off assoon as possible. A warningchime should also sound ifthis light comes on.

As a check, the light should come on for a few secondswhen you start your engine. See “Engine Overheating”in the Index.

2-63

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the enginecoolant temperature. If thegage pointer moves into the red area, the engine istoo hot.

That reading means the same thing as the warning light -- the engine coolant has overheated. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Service Engine Soon Light)

Your vehicle is equippedwith a computer whichmonitors operation of thefuel, ignition and emissioncontrol systems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended toassure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem and serviceis required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by thesystem before any problem is apparent. This mayprevent more serious damage to your vehicle. Thissystem is also designed to assist your service technicianin correctly diagnosing any malfunction.

NOTICE:

If you keep driving your vehicle with this lighton, after a while, your emission controls may notwork as well, your fuel economy may not be asgood and your engine may not run as smoothly.This could lead to costly repairs that may not becovered by your warranty.

2-64

NOTICE:

Modifications made to the engine, transaxle,exhaust or fuel system of your vehicle or thereplacement of the original tires with other thanthose of the same Tire Performance Criteria(TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controlsand may cause the SERVICE ENGINE SOONlight to come on. Modifications to these systemscould lead to costly repairs not covered by yourwarranty. This may also result in a failure to passa required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.

This light should come on, as a check to show you it isworking, when the ignition is on and the engine is notrunning. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.This light will also come on during a malfunction in oneof two ways:

� Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has beendetected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions andmay damage the emission control system on yourvehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosisand service may be required.

� Light On Steady -- An emission control systemmalfunction has been detected on your vehicle.Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis andservice may be required.

If the Light Is Flashing

The following may prevent more serious damage toyour vehicle:

� Reducing vehicle speed.

� Avoiding hard accelerations.

� Avoiding steep uphill grades.

� If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount ofcargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart theengine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the LightIs On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to yourdealer or qualified service center for service.

2-65

If the Light Is On Steady

You may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully installthe cap. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has beenleft off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuelcap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installedshould turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. The conditionwill usually be corrected when the electrical systemdries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.

Are you low on fuel?

As your engine starts to run out of fuel, your engine maynot run as efficiently as designed since small amounts ofair are sucked into the fuel line causing a misfire. Thesystem can detect this. Adding fuel should correct thiscondition. Make sure to install the fuel cap properly. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. It will take a few driving trips to turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see “Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will causeyour engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stallingwhen you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitationon acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)This will be detected by the system and cause the lightto turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least onefull tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.

If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,have your dealer or qualified service center check thevehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

2-66

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs

Some state/provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know in order to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if theSERVICE ENGINE SOON light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD(on-board diagnostic) system determines that criticalemission control systems have not been completelydiagnosed by the system. The vehicle would beconsidered not ready for inspection. This can happen ifyou have recently replaced your battery or if yourbattery has run down. The diagnostic system is designedto evaluate critical emission control systems duringnormal driving. This may take several days of routinedriving. If you have done this and your vehicle still doesnot pass the inspection for lack of OBD systemreadiness, see your dealer or qualified service center toprepare the vehicle for inspection.

Oil Pressure Light

This light tells you if therecould be a problem withyour engine oil pressure.

The light goes on when you turn your key to RUN orSTART. It goes off once you start your engine. That’s acheck to be sure the light works. If it doesn’t come on,be sure to have it fixed so it will be there to warn you ifsomething goes wrong.

When the light comes on and stays on, it means that oilisn’t flowing through your engine properly. You couldbe low on oil and you might have some other system problem.

2-67

CAUTION:

Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If you do, your engine can become so hot that itcatches fire. You or others could be burned.Check your oil as soon as possible and have yourvehicle serviced.

NOTICE:

Damage to your engine from neglected oilproblems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty.

Fuel Gage

The fuel gage showsapproximately how muchfuel is in the tank. It worksonly when the ignition is in RUN.

Here are a few concerns some owners have had aboutthe fuel gage. All of these situations are normal and donot indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage.

� At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before thegage reads F.

� It takes more (or less) gas to fill the tank than thegage said. For example, the gage read half a tank, but it took more (or less) than the tank’s remainingcapacity to fill it.

� The gage may change when you turn, stop or speed up.

2-68

Fuel Data DisplayEverything you need to know about the fuel economyand how far you can travel with your vehicle’sremaining fuel is displayed. Fuel data can be obtainedby pressing the INFO (SKIP) button. See “DIC Controlsand Displays” later in this section.

Driver Information Center (DIC)This display gives you the status of many of yourvehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to display driverpersonalization features and warning/status messages.

DIC Controls and Displays

TRIP RESET (YES): By using this button, you can tellhow far you’ve gone since you last set the YES TRIPRESET back to zero. To reset, press and hold this button until zeros appear. If your vehicle is domestic, the trip odometer will return to zero after 999.9 miles (1 609 km). If your vehicle is Canadian, the trip odometer will return to zero after 1 999.9 km (1,242 miles).

INFO RESET (NO): Pressing this button will reset theMPG AVG, GAL FUEL USED, AVG MPH, TIMER,OIL LIFE LEFT and ENGLISH/METRIC RESET.Pressing NO INFO RESET when a non-resettabledisplay appears will cause a “recall” mode to occur.When this happens, all Driver Information Center (DIC)warning messages that have been displayed since theignition key was turned to RUN will redisplay. If nomessages were displayed, a MONITORED SYSTEMSOK message will appear.

INFO (SKIP): Pressing this button repeatedly willdisplay the RANGE, MPG AVG, MPG INST, GALFUEL USED, AVG MPH, TIMER, BATTERY VOLTS,OIL LIFE LEFT, PHONE (if equipped) andENGLISH/METRIC RESET.

2-69

FUEL DOOR: Press this button to open the fuel door.(This feature will work only when the shift lever is inPARK (P) regardless of whether or not the vehicle is running.)

TRUNK: Press this button to open the trunk. (This feature will work only when the shift lever is inPARK (P) regardless of whether or not the vehicle is running.)

MPG AVG (Reset): Press the INFO (SKIP) button todisplay the MPG AVG (Average Fuel Economy), thenpress and hold the NO INFO RESET button until 0.0 MPG AVG is displayed.

GAL FUEL USED (Reset): Press the INFO (SKIP)button to display the GAL FUEL USED on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), then press and hold the INFO RESET (NO) button until 0.0 GAL FUEL USED is displayed.

AVG MPH (Reset): Press the INFO (SKIP) button todisplay the AVG MPH (Average Speed), then press andhold the INFO RESET (NO) button until 0.0 AVG MPHis displayed.

TIMER: This feature is like a stopwatch, in that you canclock the time it takes to get from one point to another.

To operate, press the INFO (SKIP) button to displayTIMER. Each of the fields for the hours, minutes andseconds are two numeric digits.

Once TIMER OFF 00:00:00 is displayed, press the INFORESET (NO) button to start the timing feature. Press theINFO RESET (NO) button again to stop it. If you will bestarting and stopping your vehicle -- during a trip forinstance -- the TIMER feature will automatically starttiming where it left off when you last stopped. To reset it,press and hold the INFO RESET (NO) button until thedisplay reads TIMER 00:00:00. Press the INFO (SKIP)button to exit from the TIMER function.

OIL LIFE LEFT (Reset): Press the INFO (SKIP)button to display the OIL LIFE LEFT, then press andhold the INFO RESET (NO) button until 100% OILLIFE LEFT is displayed. (This only needs to be resetafter you have had the oil changed.)

ENGLISH/METRIC (Reset): Press the INFO (SKIP)button to display ENGLISH/METRIC RESET, then pressthe INFO RESET (NO) button to select. The display willchange from English (miles) to metric (kilometers).

2-70

DIC MessagesThese messages will appear if there is a problem sensedin one of your vehicle’s systems. Vehicles that are firstsold in Canada will have a number after each message.This number helps to identify the message which is onlydisplayed in English.

Pressing the INFO or INFO RESET button (s) willremove most of the following messages from the DIC display:

APPLY BRAKE TO SHIFT - 46: This message will appear if your vehicle is in PARK (P) for about 15 seconds and the brake is not pressed. On the climatecontrol panel, press the OFF button (next to the MODEbutton) and the down arrow on the PASS TEMP buttonfor about five seconds. Hold the same two buttons todisplay the message again.

BATTERY NOT CHARGING - 7: This message willappear if the battery is not being charged. Have theelectrical system checked by your dealership at yourearliest convenience.

BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH - 8: This messageshows that the electrical charging system isovercharging (more than 16 volts). To avoid beingstranded, have the electrical system checked by yourdealership. You can reduce the charging overload byusing the accessories. Turn on the lamps and radio, setthe climate control on AUTO and the fan speed on HI,and turn the rear window defogger on. You can monitorbattery voltage on the DIC by pressing the INFO (SKIP)button. The normal range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts when theengine is running.

BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW - 6: This message willappear when the electrical system is charging less than10 volts or if the battery has been drained. If thismessage appears immediately after starting, it is possiblethat the generator can still recharge the battery. Thebattery should recharge and may take a few hours to doso. Consider using an auxiliary charger to boost thebattery after returning home or to a final destination. (Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions whenusing a battery charger.)

2-71

If this message appears and stays on while driving orafter starting your vehicle, have it checked immediatelyto determine the cause of this problem. To help thegenerator recharge the battery quickly, you can reducethe load on the electrical system by turning off theaccessories. You can monitor battery voltage on the DICby pressing the INFO (SKIP) button. The normal rangeis 11.5 to 15.5 volts.

BRAKE VACUUM PROBLEM -108: The circuit inthe brake booster vacuum has shorted or is loose whenthis message appears. Your vehicle may lose powerbrakes but you will still have the use of manual brakes.The power brakes will not be affected if the problem iscaused by a failed sensor. Have your vehicle servicedimmediately at your dealership.

CHANGE ENGINE OIL - 82: This means that the lifeof the engine oil has expired and it should be changedwithin 200 miles (322 km). See “Engine Oil” and “FilterRecommendations” in the Maintenance Schedulebooklet. After an oil change, the Oil Life Indicator mustbe reset. See “Oil Life Indicator, How to Reset” in the Index.

CHANGE TRANS FLUID - 47: This message willappear when it is time to replace the transaxle fluid. See the Maintenance Schedule booklet for the properfluid and change intervals.

CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL - 37: This messagewill display if the ignition is in RUN to inform thedriver that the brake fluid level is low. Have the brakesystem serviced by a technician as soon as possible. See “Brake System Warning Light” in the Index.

CHECK COOLANT LEVEL - 2: This message willappear when there is a low level of engine coolant. Have the cooling system serviced by a technician assoon as possible.

CHECK FUEL GAUGE - 39: This message willappear when the fuel supply is less than 3.5 gallons(13.2 L) remaining and the display is turned off (digitalclusters only). A single chime will also sound when thismessage is displayed.

CHECK GAS CAP - 61: This message will appear ifthe gas cap has not been fully tightened. You shouldrecheck your gas cap to ensure that it’s fully tightened.

2-72

CHECK OIL LEVEL - 36: For correct operation of thelow oil sensing system, your vehicle should be on a levelsurface. A false CHECK OIL LEVEL message mayappear if the vehicle is parked on grades. The oil levelsensing system does not check for actual oil level if theengine has been off for a short period of time, and the oillevel is never sensed while the engine is running. If theCHECK OIL LEVEL message appears and your vehiclehas been parked on level ground with the engine off forat least 30 minutes, the oil level should be checked byobserving the oil dipstick. Prior to checking the oil level,be sure the engine has been off for five minutes and yourvehicle is on a level surface. Then check the dipstick andadd oil if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.

CHECK WASHER FLUID - 25: This message willappear for several seconds indicating that you needwindshield washer solvent.

CRUISE ENGAGED - 43: This message will appearfor a few seconds when you select a speed at which to cruise.

DOOR AJAR - 141: A door other than the driver’s is open or ajar when this message appears. The vehicle’sengine must be running and the transaxle not in PARK (P) for this message to display. A chime will also sound when the vehicle’s speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).

DRIVER DOOR AJAR - 140: This message will display when the vehicle is being shifted out of PARK (P) with the engine running to signal that thedriver’s door is open or ajar. A chime will also soundwhen the vehicle’s speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).

ENGINE COOLANT HOT, IDLE ENGINE - 44:This message will appear when the engine coolanttemperature is over 248�F (126�C). To avoid addedstrain on a hot engine, turn off the climate controlsystem. Stop and allow your vehicle to idle until it coolsdown or the message is removed. If it does not cooldown, turn off the engine and have it serviced beforedriving it again. Severe engine damage can result froman overheated engine. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.

ENGINE HOT - A/C OFF - 16: This message displayswhen the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normaloperating temperature. To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioning compressor is automaticallyturned off so that air conditioned air is not delivered. If the coolant temperature returns to normal, you mustselect AC to return to a normal A/C compressoroperation. If this message continues to appear, have the system repaired as soon as possible to avoidcompressor damage.

2-73

ENGINE MISFIRE -- EASE OFF GAS PEDAL - 114: An engine misfire has occurred. You’ll need to ease off the gas pedal.

ENGINE OVERHEATED, STOP ENGINE - 42: This message will appear when the engine hasoverheated. Stop and turn the engine off immediately to avoid severe engine damage. See “EngineOverheating” in the Index. A multiple chime will alsosound when this message is displayed.

ENGINE POWER REDUCED - 41: This messageinforms you that your vehicle is reducing engine powerbecause the transaxle is being placed in gear underconditions that may cause damage to the vehiclepowertrain or vehicle acceleration.

FUEL LEVEL LOW - 11: This message serves as awarning that the fuel level in the tank is critically low.Stop for fuel soon.

HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED - 23: If it’s dark enough outside and the Twilight Sentinel control is off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will display onthe DIC. This message informs the driver that turning onthe exterior lamps is recommended even though theDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) are still illuminated(it’s become dark enough outside to require theheadlamps and/or other exterior lamps).

ICE POSSIBLE - 13: This message appears when the outside air temperature is cold enough to create icyroad conditions.

LOW REFRIG A/C OFF - 12: This message meansthat the air conditioning system detects a refrigerantlevel that is low enough to cause damage to the airconditioning compressor. Have the air conditioningsystem serviced if this message appears.

MONITORED SYSTEMS OK - 1: This message onlyappears in the “recall” mode by pressing the INFORESET (NO) button. It lets you know that no othermessages are stored or currently active.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE - 35: If thismessage appears while the engine is running, stop theengine and do not operate it until the cause of low oilpressure is corrected. Severe damage to the engine canresult. A multiple chime will also sound when thismessage is displayed.

OPTIONS NOT SET - 99: This message will display ifa fault has occurred in your vehicle’s memory. Haveyour vehicle serviced by your dealership.

PROGRAM PASS KEY - 31: This warning messagedisplays when the PASS-Key� II pellet information hasnot been programmed into your vehicle. See yourdealership for service.

2-74

PHONE NOT PRESENT - 126: This message willappear when the steering wheel controls for the optionalphone system are activated but the phone is not pluggedinto the vehicle. Make sure your phone is plugged in. If your phone appears to be connected, see yourdealership for service.

REMOVE KEY - 70: This message will appear when the Personalized Automotive Security System(PASS-Key� II) is unable to read the pellet on theignition key or an improper key pellet has been inserted.This message usually appears following the display ofSTARTING DISABLED REMOVE KEY. Theinstrument panel cluster will then run a timer andchange the messages to WAIT 3 MINUTES, WAIT 2MINUTES, WAIT 1 MINUTE and then START CAR.When the REMOVE KEY message is displayed, removethe ignition key. Check the ignition key for damage. If itis damaged, it may need to be replaced. If you see nodamage, clean the pellet contacts with a soft cloth ornapkin before inserting the key back into the ignition.Have your vehicle serviced if the message still appears.

SERVICE A/C SYSTEM - 14: This message appears when the electronic sensors that control the airconditioning and heating systems are no longer working.Have the climate control system serviced if you notice adrop in heating and air conditioning efficiency.

SERVICE AIR BAG - 83: There is a problem with theSupplemental Inflatable Restraint (air bag) system whenthis message appears. Let only a qualified technician workon your vehicle. See your dealership for service at once.

SERVICE BRAKE FLUID SWITCH - 37: A problemin the brake fluid detection circuit causes this messageto display if the ignition is in RUN. Have the brakesystem serviced by a technician as soon as possible. Ifthe brake warning light is on, refer to the directionslisted in that part.

SERVICE CHARGING SYSTEM - 102: Thismessage will display when a problem with the chargingsystem has been detected. Have your vehicle serviced atyour dealership.

SERVICE ELECTRIC SYS - 106: This message willdisplay if an electrical problem has occurred within thePowertrain Control Module (PCM). Have your vehicleserviced by your dealership.

SERVICE FUEL SYSTEM - 101: The PCM hasdetected a problem within the fuel system when thismessage appears. See your dealership for service.

SERVICE IDLE CONTROL - 107: A problem withthe idle control has occurred when this message displays.Drive your vehicle to the dealership for service.

2-75

SERVICE RIDE SYS - 84: This message is displayedto indicate that the suspension system is not operatingproperly. To correct this problem, have your vehicleserviced at your dealership.

SERVICE STEERING SYS - 127: This message isdisplayed when a problem has been detected in theMagnasteer� variable effort steering system. Service isrequired. A single chime will also sound when thismessage is displayed.

SERVICE TRANSMISSION - 100: If a problem isdetected with the transaxle, this message will appear.Have your vehicle checked by your dealership.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON - 3: If a problem isdetected with the transaxle, this message will appear.Have your vehicle checked by your dealership.

SERV STABILITY SYS - 54: If you ever see theSERV STABILITY SYS message, it means there maybe a problem with your stability enhancement system. If you see this message, try to reset the system (stop; turn off the engine; then start the engine again). If the SERV STABILITY SYS message still comes on,it means there is a problem. You should see your dealerfor service. Reduce your speed and drive accordingly. A single chime will also sound when this message is displayed.

STABILITY ENGAGED - 55: You may see theSTABILITY ENGAGED message on the DriverInformation Center. It means that an advanced,computer-controlled system has come on to help yourvehicle continue to go in the direction in which you’resteering. This stability enhancement system activateswhen the computer senses that your vehicle is juststarting to spin, as it might if you hit a patch of ice orother slippery spot on the road. When the system is on,you may hear a noise or feel a vibration in the brakepedal. This is normal.

When the STABILITY ENGAGED message is on, youshould continue to steer in the direction you want to go.The system is designed to help you in bad weather orother difficult driving situations by making the most ofwhatever road conditions will permit. If the STABILITYENGAGED message comes on, you’ll know thatsomething has caused your vehicle to start to spin, so you should consider slowing down.

2-76

STARTING DISABLED REMOVE KEY - 33: This message will appear when the PersonalizedAutomotive Security System (PASS-Key� II) sensesthat an improper ignition key is being used to try to startthe vehicle. Check the ignition key for damage. If it isdamaged, it may need to be replaced. If you see nodamage, clean the pellet contacts with a soft cloth ornapkin. Remove the ignition key and wait for the DIC todisplay WAIT 3 MINUTES. The instrument panelcluster will then run a timer and change the messages toWAIT 2 MINUTES, WAIT 1 MINUTE and thenSTART CAR. When the START CAR message isdisplayed, try again to start the engine.

THEFT SYSTEM PROBLEM, CAR MAY NOTRESTART - 34: This message means there is a problem in the Personalized Automotive Security System(PASS-Key� II). A fault has been detected in the systemwhich means that the PASS-Key� II system is disabledand is not protecting the vehicle. The vehicle usuallyrestarts, however, you may want to take your vehicle to aproper service center before turning off the engine.

TOP SPEED FUEL OFF - 111: This message willappear when the PCM senses that the maximum speedfor your vehicle has been reached. The speed of yourvehicle will decrease several mph as the fuel supply iscut off. This allows your vehicle to stay in a stableoperating range.

TRACTION ENGAGED - 91 : When your tractioncontrol system is limiting wheel spin, the TRACTIONENGAGED message will be displayed. Slippery roadconditions may exist if this message is displayed, soadjust your driving accordingly. This message will stayon for a few seconds after the traction control systemstops limiting wheel spin.

TRACTION OFF - 89: This message will be displayedafter the traction control has been turned off.

TRACTION READY - 90: This message informs thedriver that the traction control system is available. Thisoccurs when the traction on/off button in the glove boxhas been returned to an on position (pressing the buttononce turns the traction control system off: pressing thebutton again turns the system back on). This messagealso self-cancels after five seconds.

TRACTION SUSPENDED - 56: This messagedisplays when the traction control system has beentemporarily shut off because your vehicle’s brakes haveoverheated. This message does not indicate a problemwith your vehicle’s traction control system. After a few minutes, the traction control system will beavailable again and the TRACTION READY message will appear.

2-77

TRANS FLUID RESET - 48: With the engine not running and the ignition on, press and hold the OFF and rear defog buttons until the TRANS FLUID RESET message appears on the DIC (between five and 20 seconds).

TRANS HOT IDLE ENG - 112: This messageindicates that the transaxle fluid in your vehicle is toohot. Stop and allow your vehicle to idle until it coolsdown or until this message is removed.

TRUNK OPEN - 24: This message indicates that thetrunk is open when your vehicle’s ignition is in RUN.

TURN SIGNAL ON - 20: This message is a reminder,after driving about 1 mile (1.6 km/h), that you have theturn signal on. A multiple chime will also sound whenthis message is displayed.

VEHICLE OVERSPEED - 52:This message isdisplayed when the vehicle speed exceeds a certain limitas required by some export countries. A continuouschime will also sound when this message is displayed.

VEHICLE SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH(KM/H) - 113: A failure in the suspension controlsystem has occurred when this message appears. ThePowertrain Control Module (PCM) determines the speedyour vehicle is limited to. Have your vehicle serviced ifthis message appears. (The XXX indicates the speedyour vehicle is limited to.)

Memory and Personalization Features (If Equipped)Your vehicle may be equipped with the followingfeatures that can be individually programmed,memorized or personalized for up to two drivers. For a brief description of each feature, see each featurein the Index.

Memory Seat and Mirrors

To begin programming,adjust the driver’s seat(including lumbaradjustments) and bothoutside mirrors to acomfortable position andthen press the SET button.Within five seconds, press button “1.”

A second mirror and seating position may beprogrammed by repeating the above steps and pressingbutton “2” instead of button 1. Note that each time amemory button is pressed, a single beep will soundthrough the left front speaker.

2-78

If your vehicle is in PARK (P), you can recall mirror andseating positions by briefly pressing button 1 or 2. This will adjust the seat and mirrors to where you havepreviously programmed them. If you have accidentallypressed one of the memory recall buttons and want tostop seat or mirror movement, press one of the manualseat or mirror control buttons. This cancels a memory recall.

You can also recall a seat and mirror position if yourvehicle is not in PARK (P). Press and hold either the 1 or 2 button until seat and mirror movement iscomplete. Releasing the buttons will stop adjustment.

The EXIT button can be programmed to allow easy exitfor up to two drivers. Adjust the seat to a comfortable“exit” position and then press the SET button followedby the EXIT button. While your vehicle is in PARK (P),briefly press the EXIT button to recall your programmedexit position.

Programmable Automatic Door Locks

Your vehicle’s ignition must be in RUN. To beginprogramming, press and hold the SKIP INFO and NOINFO RESET buttons at the same time to display thefollowing prompts.

DOORS LOCK IN GEAR: All doors automaticallylock when shifted out of PARK (P). No automatic door unlock.

DRIVR UNLOCK IN PARK: All doors automaticallylock when shifted out of PARK (P). Only the driver’sdoor automatically unlocks when shifted into PARK (P).

DRIVR UNLOCK KEY OFF: All doors automaticallylock when shifted out of PARK (P). Only the driver’sdoor automatically unlocks when the ignition key isturned to OFF.

DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK: All doors automaticallylock when shifted out of PARK (P) and unlock whenshifting into PARK (P).

DOORS UNLOCK KEY OFF: All doorsautomatically lock when shifted out of PARK (P). All doors automatically unlock when the ignition key isturned to OFF.

A “yes” or “no” response must be made after eachprompt is displayed in order to continue on to the nextprompt or personalization feature. Press the YES TRIPRESET button to choose yes, press the NO INFORESET button to choose no or press the SKIP INFObutton to “skip” to the next personalization feature.

2-79

FEATURE ON appears when a yes response is madeand FEATURE OFF appears with a no response.

If a no response is made after the DOORS LOCK INGEAR prompt is displayed, FEATURE OFF will appear.The automatic door locking system has been disabledand no other door lock messages will be displayed.LGHTS FLSH AT UNLOCK, which is the nextavailable personalization feature to display, will appearnext. See “Lock/Unlock Confirmation” in the Index for more information.

If a yes response is made after the DOORS LOCK INGEAR prompt is displayed, FEATURE ON appears.The automatic door locking system is enabled andallows the DRIVR UNLOCK IN PARK prompt toappear. Choosing this prompt advances you to LGHTSFLSH AT UNLOCK whereas a no response will displaythe DRIVR UNLOCK KEY OFF prompt.

If DRIVR UNLOCK KEY OFF is chosen, FEATUREON appears. You will advance to the LGHTS FLSH AT UNLOCK prompt. If you don’t choose this prompt, FEATURE OFF appears as well as the nextprompt -- DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK. If this promptis chosen, FEATURE ON appears. If a no response wasmade, DOORS UNLOCK KEY OFF will appear. At thispoint, a yes or no response automatically brings up theLGHTS FLSH AT UNLOCK feature.

Lock/Unlock Confirmation

This personalization feature allows the driver toprogram the parking lamps to blink when the lock orunlock buttons on the remote keyless entry transmitterare pressed, to program the horn to sound when the lockbutton is pressed and/or to program the exterior lamps toturn on when the unlock button is pressed. Press theYES TRIP RESET button to answer yes, press the NOINFO RESET button to indicate no or press the SKIPINFO button to skip to the next personalization feature.

To begin programming, your vehicle’s ignition must bein RUN. Press and hold the SKIP INFO and NO INFORESET buttons at the same time to display thefollowing prompts. LOCK/UNLOCK confirmation isthe second feature to appear. To skip past the firstpersonalization feature, press the SKIP INFO button.

LGHTS FLSH AT UNLOCK: Parking lamps blinktwice when the unlock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter is pressed.

LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK: Parking lamps blinkonce when the lock button on the remote keyless entrytransmitter is pressed.

HORN SOUNDS AT LOCK: Horn sounds when thelock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed.

2-80

EXT LIGHTS AT UNLOCK: Exterior lamps (parkinglamps, taillamps, sidemarker lamps, license plate lamps,low-beam headlamps, etc.) turn on when the unlockbutton on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressedand it is dark outside. These lamps stay on for about 20 seconds or until the key is turned OFF.

The prompts listed here appear in the same order asdisplayed on the DIC. FEATURE ON appears when a yes response is made and FEATURE OFF appears with a no response. To skip to the next personalization feature(REMOTE RECALL MEMORY), press the SKIP INFO button.

Remote Recall Memory (If Equipped with Memory Personalization)

Memory settings that have been previously programmed(climate control settings, radio preset settings, exteriorlighting choices, remote confirmation choices andprogrammable automatic door lock choices) can berecalled by using the remote keyless entry transmitter or by placing the key in your vehicle’s ignition.

Before you begin programming, make sure that yourvehicle’s ignition is in RUN. To begin programming,press the SKIP INFO and NO INFO RESET buttons at the same time for about two seconds. As mentioned,remote recall memory is the third feature to appear.

To skip past the first two personalization features, press the SKIP INFO button.

When REMOTE RECALL MEMORY appears, thedriver is able to recall memory settings when the unlockbutton on the remote keyless entry transmitter ispressed. Press the YES TRIP RESET button to select orpress the NO INFO RESET button to answer no and tocontinue on to the next prompt. FEATURE ON displayswhen a yes response is made.

If a no response was made, the KEY IN RECALLMEMORY prompt will show next. This choice recallsmemory settings when the key is placed in yourvehicle’s ignition. FEATURE ON displays for a yesresponse, and FEATURE OFF for a no response. A yes or no response is required.

Curb View Assist Mirror (If Equipped with Memory)

If your vehicle has this personalization feature, MIRRORTILT IN REV will be the fourth personalization promptto display on the DIC.

To program your vehicle, press the SKIP INFO and NO INFO RESET buttons at the same time for about two seconds. When MIRROR TILT IN REV appears, a yes or no response is needed. Press the YES TRIP RESET button to answer yes or the NO INFO RESET button to answer no.

2-81

FEATURE ON displays when a yes response is made and FEATURE OFF shows after a no response. If you do not want this feature, press the SKIP INFO button to skip to the next personalization feature which is STORAGE MODE.

Storage Mode Personalization

Before you begin programming, make sure that yourvehicle’s ignition is in RUN. To begin programming,press the SKIP INFO and NO INFO RESET buttons atthe same time for about two seconds. The first messageto appear is DOORS LOCK IN GEAR. Press the SKIP INFO button after this prompt is displayed untilSTORAGE MODE prompt appears on the DIC. Pressthe YES TRIP RESET button to answer yes or press theNO INFO RESET button to indicate a no response.

FEATURE ON appears when a yes response is madeand FEATURE OFF shows when a no response is made.Since this is the last personalization feature available, ayes or no response will end out of the DriverInformation Center (DIC) display.

Once the battery guard has been programmed, yourvehicle will enter the storage mode about 20 minutesafter the ignition key has been turned off.

Your vehicle will stay in the storage mode until theignition key is turned out of LOCK. The system will“wake-up” when the door key is inserted into the door,however, your vehicle will remain in the storage mode.The ignition must be out of LOCK before the batteryguard is disabled.

Comfort Controls and Radio System Personalization

These features allow both drivers to personalize theirown climate control settings as well as their radiosettings. For more information, see “Climate ControlPersonalization” and “Radio Personalization” in the Index.

Continuous Variable Road SensingSuspension (CVRSS) (ETC Only)The CVRSS automatically adjusts the ride of yourvehicle. Automatic ride control is achieved through acomputer used to control and monitor the suspensionsystem. The controller receives input from varioussensors to determine the proper system response. If the controller detects a problem within the system, the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display aSERVICE RIDE CONTROL message. If this messageappears, have your vehicle serviced at your dealership.

2-82

Oil Life Indicator This feature lets you know when to change the engineoil. It’s based on the engine oil temperatures and yourdriving patterns. To see the display, press the SKIPINFO button several times until XX OIL LIFE LEFTappears. If you see 99% OIL LIFE LEFT, 99 percent of your current oil life remains.

The Driver Information Center (DIC) may display aCHANGE ENGINE OIL message. Always keep awritten record of the mileage and date when youchanged your oil. For more information, see theMaintenance Schedule booklet. If you see CHANGEENGINE OIL, it means that you have no oil life left and you should change your engine oil right away.

When the oil is changed, you’ll need to reset the system.See “Oil Life Indicator, How to Reset” in the Index.

3-3-1

Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems

In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.

3- 2 Comfort Controls3- 2 Climate Control Panel3- 6 Electronic Solar Sensor3- 6 Air Conditioning3- 6 Heating3- 7 Defrosting3- 7 Rear Window Defogger3- 8 Ventilation System3- 9 HVAC Steering Wheel Controls3- 9 Climate Control Personalization (If Equipped)3- 9 Audio Systems3- 9 Setting the Clock3- 10 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player3- 13 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and

Compact Disc Player with Radio DataSystems (RDS) and Digital Signal Processing (DPS) (If Equipped)

3- 22 Radio Data Systems (RDS) Program Type (PTY) Selections

3- 23 CD Adapter Kits3- 23 Trunk Mounted CD Changer (Option)3- 27 Radio Personalization with Home and

Away Feature (If Equipped)3- 28 Theft-Deterrent Feature3- 28 Audio Steering Wheel Controls3- 29 Understanding Radio Reception3- 29 Tips About Your Audio System3- 30 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player3- 31 Care of Your Compact Discs3- 32 Care of Your Compact Disc Player3- 32 Power Antenna Mast Care

3-2

Comfort ControlsThis section tells you how to make your air system workfor you.

With the ECC system, you can control the heating,cooling and ventilation in your vehicle. Your vehiclealso has a flow-through ventilation system describedlater in this section.

Climate Control Panel

Fan Button

The button with the fan symbol adjusts the fan speed.Press the up arrow to increase fan speed and the downarrow to decrease fan speed.

Driver’s Side Temperature Knob

The TEMP/AUTO knob adjusts the air temperaturecoming through the system. Turn the TEMP/AUTOknob clockwise to increase the temperature andcounterclockwise to decrease the temperature. Press the TEMP/AUTO knob to put the system in the automatic mode.

Passenger’s Side Temperature Button

With this dual-zone feature, the right front passengercan control the temperature of air for his/her own zone.The passenger can select a four degree warmer or coolertemperature from the driver’s setting. To turn the systemon, press the PASS/TEMP button. Press the up arrow to increase the temperature and press the down arrow todecrease the climate setting. Pressing the OFF buttonwill turn off the dual-zone function.

Outside Temperature Display

The outside temperature is always displayed when yourvehicle is running. You can change it from Fahrenheit toCelsius by pressing the SKIP INFO button (above theradio) until ENGLISH/METRIC RESET displays. Oncedisplayed, press the NO INFO RESET button to select.

3-3

The outside temperature sensor is located near the frontgrille. The sensor can be affected by road or engine heatduring idling, slow driving or when the engine is firststarted after a short trip. In order to ensure properautomatic climate control operation, the outside airtemperature display may not update as quickly asexpected. This is to allow the air surrounding the outsidetemperature sensor to be as close to the actual outsideconditions as possible. This is determined by how muchtime has elapsed since the vehicle has been turned offand by vehicle speed.

Mode Button

Press the MODE button to deliver air through the floor,middle or windshield outlets. The system will stay in theselected mode until the MODE button is pressed again.Press the up or down arrow to cycle through theavailable modes.

Automatic Operation

When the system is set for automatic operation, sensorswill control the air delivery mode. Air will come fromthe floor, middle or windshield outlets. The fan speedwill vary as the system maintains the selectedtemperature setting.

Be careful not to put anything over the solar sensorlocated in the middle of the instrument panel near thewindshield. This sensor is used by the automatic systemto regulate temperature.

To find your comfort zone, start with the 75�F (24�C)setting and allow about 30 minutes for the system toregulate. Turn the TEMP/AUTO knob to adjust thetemperature if necessary. If you choose 60�F (16�C),the system will remain at that maximum cooling settingand will not regulate fan speed. If you choose thetemperature of 90�F (32�C), the system will remain atthat maximum heating setting and will not regulate fanspeed. Choosing either maximum setting will not causethe system to heat or cool any faster.

With the automatic setting, the air conditioningcompressor automatically cycles when needed to coolthe air. In cold weather, when the system senses the need for heat, the airflow will be directed out the flooroutlets. As the interior temperature approaches a desiredsetting, the blower speed will decrease. To maintaininterior comfort, the airflow may move to the instrumentpanel air outlets and floor outlets (bi-level mode). Onbright sunny days in cold weather, the airflow may comeout of the air conditioning outlets (AC mode) tomaintain comfort and prevent stuffiness.

3-4

If your vehicle is sitting out on a hot day and you have itset on AUTO, the air will first flow out the floor airoutlets for a few seconds. That is normal. This is toexpel hot air from the air outlets. As the air is cooled,the airflow will move through the air conditioningoutlets. If you start your vehicle with the fan setting onHI, it will skip the air conditioning purge.

To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the systemwill delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.The length of delay depends on the outside airtemperature, engine coolant temperature or the timesince the engine was last started. As the coolant warmsup, the blower fan speed will gradually increase and airwill flow from the heater outlets, with some airflow to the windshield to prevent fogging under most normal conditions.

If you leave your vehicle, the system will remember thecontrol setting the next time you start your engine,except for recirculation and defrost. Each ignition cyclecancels recirculation, whereas, DEFROST will changeto automatic operation when the ignition is shut off andthen turned back on.

Manual Operation

You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or fan speed.

BI-LEVEL: This setting directs air into yourvehicle in two ways. Cool air is directed to the upperportion of your body through the four instrument paneloutlets while warmed air is directed to the floor.

HEATER/DEFROST: This setting directs air tothe floor outlets and toward the windshield.

HEATER: This setting directs warmed airthrough the floor outlets. Some warm air is diverted tothe windshield to minimize fogging.

DEFROST: Press this button to quickly removefog or frost from the windshield. This setting sends mostof the airflow to the windshield with only a smallamount to the floor outlets.

3-5

FAN SPEEDS: Press the button with the fansymbol on it until AUTO is displayed on the screen. At this setting, the fan speed is automatically controlled.If it is cold outside, the blower may not run in themaximum high fan speed right away. The system checksthe temperature of the engine coolant to assure it iswarm enough to provide heat. When the engine coolantis warm, the controller allows the fan to graduallyincrease to a higher speed. This prevents cold air fromblowing into the passenger compartment. If you wantthe blower fan at a high speed, press the up arrow buttonuntil you see HI on the display. If you want the fanspeed to be automatic, but you like the fan speed to behigher than the AUTO setting, press the fan symbolbutton until HI AUTO is shown on the display. If you want the blower fan at a low speed, press thedown arrow button until LO is shown on the display. If you want the fan speed to run lower than the AUTO setting, press the button until LO AUTO isshown on the display.

OFF: Press this button to turn the system off. Fresh air will continue to flow through the vehicle, andthe system will try to maintain the previously settemperature. The outside temperature will show on thedisplay when the system is OFF.

AC: Press this button to turn the air conditioning on andoff. The system will cool and dehumidify the air insidethe vehicle. In the AUTO mode, the display will showthat AC is active, but the air conditioning compressoronly operates when the system determines it is needed.

RECIRCULATION: Press this button to limit the amount of fresh air entering your vehicle. This ishelpful when you are trying to cool the air quickly orlimit odors entering your vehicle. In the AUTO mode,the system will use recirculation as necessary to cool the air. Pressing the recirculation button will change theoperation to a manual mode and the air will recirculatenon-stop. Press this button again to turn off therecirculation feature.

If you notice the windows fogging, press therecirculation button to exit the recirculation mode.

3-6

Electronic Solar Sensor

The sensor monitors the sun’s solar radiation and islocated on top of the instrument panel near thewindshield. The ECC panel uses this information toautomatically make the necessary temperature andairflow adjustments to maintain your comfort.

Air ConditioningOn hot days, open the windows long enough to let hotinside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for yourvehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closedfor the air conditioner to work its best.

Press the AC button or the TEMP/AUTO knob to turnthe system on and then select the proper mode to directairflow. The system will cool and dehumidify the airinside the vehicle. Also while in the AUTO mode, thesystem will use recirculation as necessary to cool the air.You may also need to adjust the interior temperature andthe fan speed as needed.

When the air conditioner is on, you may sometimesnotice slight changes in your vehicle’s engine speed andpower. This is normal because the system is designed to cycle the compressor on and off to keep the desired temperature.

HeatingPress the MODE button to select heater. Adjust theinterior temperature to a comfortable level and if the fanspeed needs adjusting, press the up or down arrow.

Outside air will be brought in and sent through the floor,air conditioning or bi-level outlets (depending on thecondition). The heater works best if you keep yourwindows closed while using it.

3-7

DefrostingUse defrost to remove fog or ice from the windshieldquickly in extremely humid or cold conditions.

Press the MODE button. If you select DEFROST, adjustthe fan speed by pressing the fan button up or down. If you select DEFROST from AUTO, the system willcontrol the fan speed. The temperature also needs to beadjusted by turning the TEMP/AUTO knob.

Recirculation is not available in the defrost or defog modes.

Rear Window Defogger

The lines you see on therear window warm theglass. Press this button toturn on the rear defogger.With it, the rear windowand both outside rearviewmirrors are heated.

The system will automatically shut off after 10 minutes.If further defogging is desired, press the button again.

Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decalsacross the defogger grid on the rear window.

NOTICE:

Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharpon the inside of the rear window. If you do, youcould cut or damage the warming grid or theintegrated rear window antenna, and the repairswouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

3-8

Ventilation SystemYour vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system suppliesoutside air into the vehicle when it is moving. Outsideair will also enter the vehicle when the heater or the airconditioning fan is running.

The front outlets are located in the center and at eachside of the instrument panel. You can adjust thedirection of airflow by moving the center control leversor you can stop the airflow by moving the lever locatedon each side of the outlets downward.

The direction of airflow for the rear seats can also beadjusted. Move the fan lever to adjust the blower speedfrom low to high. Move the vent lever to direct the airflow.

Ventilation Tips

� Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow orany other obstruction (such as leaves). The heaterand defroster will work far better, reducing thechance of fogging the inside of the windows.

3-9

� When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, adjust thefan to the highest speed for a few moments beforedriving off. This helps clear the intake outlets ofsnow and moisture, and reduces the chance offogging the inside of the windows.

� Keep the air path under the front seats clear ofobjects. This helps circulate air throughout your vehicle.

HVAC Steering Wheel Controls

Some heating and coolingcontrols can be adjusted atthe steering wheel. Othertouch controls operate someaudio controls. See“AudioSteering Wheel Controls” inthe Index.

FAN SPEED: Press the up arrow lever to increasethe fan speed and the down arrow lever to decrease fan speed.

TEMP: Press the up arrow lever to increase thetemperature and the down arrow lever to decrease temperature.

Climate Control Personalization (If Equipped)This feature allows both driver’s (driver 1 or 2 dependingon the number on the back of your remote keyless entrytransmitter) to personalize their own climate controlsettings. For more information, see “Memory andPersonalization Features” in the Index.

Audio SystemsYour audio system has been designed to operate easilyand give years of listening pleasure. You will get themost enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with itfirst. Find out what your audio system can do and howto operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting themost out of the advanced engineering that went into it.

Setting the ClockPress and hold HR or MN until the time display beginsto change. Release the button as you get close to thecorrect time. The time may be set anytime the clock isdisplayed. There is a two-second delay before the clockgoes into time-set mode.

3-10

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player

Playing the Radio

PWR/VOL: Press this knob lightly to turn the systemon. Press the knob again to turn the system off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn itcounterclockwise to decrease volume. The volume levelwill appear on the display.

HR or MN: Display the time with the ignition off bypressing this button.

DSPL: Press this button to display the radio stationbeing played.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to select AM, FM1 or FM2.

SEEK-TUNE: Press and release this button to seek tothe next higher or lower radio station. Pressing andholding this button until a chime sounds puts the radioin a tune mode. In this mode, higher or lower radiostations are advanced to in small increments until theSEEK-TUNE button is released. Tuning stops when you release this button. If you press and hold theSEEK-TUNE button again within five seconds of being in the tune mode, tuning will continue. Waitinglonger than five seconds places the radio back in theseek mode.

SCAN: Press this button and SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN to listen to stations for a fewseconds. The radio will go to a station, stop for a fewseconds, then go on to the next station. Press this buttonagain to stop scanning.

3-11

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons letyou return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1 or FM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons for more than two seconds until you hear a beep.Whenever you press that numbered button for lessthan two seconds, the station you set will return.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

When battery power is removed and later applied, youwill not have to reset your radio presets because theradio remembers them.

PRESET SCAN: Press and hold SCAN for two to three seconds until PRESET SCAN appears on thedisplay to listen to each of your preset stations for a few seconds (factory presets which have not beenreprogrammed with your stations will be ignored). The radio will go to the first preset station stored onyour pushbuttons, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press SCAN again to stopscanning. If a preset station has weak reception, theradio will not stop at the preset station.

Setting the Tone

BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn theknob clockwise to increase and counterclockwise todecrease bass.

TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn theknob clockwise to increase and counterclockwise todecrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you maywant to decrease the treble.

Push these knobs back into their stored positions whenyou’re not using them.

Adjusting the Speakers

BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn theknob clockwise to adjust sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise for the left speakers. The middleposition balances the sound between the speakers.

FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn theknob clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakersand counterclockwise for the rear speakers. The middleposition balances the sound between the speakers.

Push these knobs back into their stored positions whenyou’re not using them.

3-12

Playing a Cassette Tape

With the radio on, insert a cassette tape. The tape will begin playing as soon as it is inserted. When one side of your cassette tape is done playing, auto reverse plays the other sideof your cassette tape. If you want to insert a cassette tape when the ignition is off, first press the eject button.

While the tape is playing, use the VOL, FADE, BAL,BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio.Other controls may have different functions when a tapeis inserted. The display will show TAPE with an arrow toindicate which side of the tape is playing. PLAY willappear on the display temporarily when a tape is playing.The display will then revert back to showing the time.

If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape, it could be that:

� The cassette tape is tight and the cassette playercannot turn the hubs of the tape. Hold the cassettetape with the open end down and try turning the righthub counterclockwise with a pencil. Flip the tapeover and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, yourcassette tape may be damaged and should not beused in the player. Try a new tape to be sure yourplayer is working properly.

� The cassette tape is broken. (Check to see if yourtape is broken. Try a new tape.)

REV: Press the left arrow to rewind the tape rapidly.The radio will play while the tape reverses and REVwill appear on the display. You may use your stationpushbuttons to tune to another radio station while inREV mode. Press the left arrow again to return toplaying speed.

FF: Press the right arrow to fast forward to another partof the tape. The radio will play while the tape advancesand FF will appear on the display. You may use yourstation pushbuttons to tune to another radio station whilein FF mode. Press the right arrow again to return toplaying speed.

SEEK-TUNE: Press the right arrow to seek to the nextselection on the tape. Press the left arrow to search forthe previous selection on the tape (REP will appear onthe display). Your tape must have at least three secondsof silence between each selection for SEEK-TUNE towork. The sound will mute while seeking.

SCAN: Press this button. SCAN FF will appear on thedisplay until the next selection is found and then SCANPLAY will appear on the display. Use SCAN to listen toselections for a few seconds. The tape will go to aselection, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the nextselection. Press this button again to stop scanning.

SIDE: Press this button to change the side of the tapethat is playing. (PLAY shows on the display.)

3-13

SOURCE: Press this button to select a source. If no cassette tape is in the tape player, CASS appears on the display and then the radio station appears briefly. The display then revertsback to showing the time of day. Press this button again or press BAND to switch back to the radio.

EJECT: Press the upward triangle button to removea tape. The radio will play. Eject may be activated withthe radio off. Cassette tapes may be loaded with the radiooff but they will not start playing until the PWR button ispressed. Press PWR or turn the ignition off to stop thecassette tape player. The tape will stay in the player andresume play at the point where it stopped.

CLN: If this message appears on the display, thecassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still playtapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible toprevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care ofYour Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean the player, press and hold the eject button for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio willdisplay --- to show the indicator was reset.

Your cassette tape player automatically reducesbackground noise from tapes. Dolby Noise Reduction ismanufactured under a license from Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape andCompact Disc Player with Radio DataSystems (RDS) and Digital SignalProcessing (DSP) (If Equipped)

Playing the Radio

PWR/VOL: Press this knob lightly to turn the systemon. Press the knob again to turn the system off. Toincrease volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn itcounterclockwise to decrease volume.

3-14

HR or MN: Display the time with the ignition off bypressing this button.

SOURCE: Press this button to select a source. Sourcesinclude cassette and compact disc. The audio sourcemust be loaded to play. Available loaded sources areshown on the display. If a source is being used, it will beunderlined on the display. If none of the audio sourcesare loaded, NO SOURCE LOADED will appear on thedisplay. Press this button again or press BAND to switchback to the radio.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to select AM, FM1, FM2 or weather.

TUNE SEEK: When this button is pressed it has two positions. Press this button to the first position tomanually tune to higher or lower stations. If this buttonis held at the first position for a few seconds, the radiowill continue tuning until this button is released. Pressthis button to the second position and release to seek tothe next higher or lower radio station.

SCAN: Press this button for less than two seconds toscan radio stations. The radio will go to a station, stopfor five seconds, then go on to the next station. Pressthis button again to stop scanning.

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons letyou return to your favorite stations. The RDS PTYmode must be off to use this mode. You can set up to 24 stations (six AM, six FM1, six FM2 and six weather). Just:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1, FM2 or weather.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons formore than two seconds. Whenever you press thatnumbered button for less than two seconds, thestation you set will return.


When battery power is removed and later applied, youwill not have to reset your radio presets because theradio remembers them.

PRESET SCAN: Press and hold SCAN for more thantwo seconds until you hear a beep to listen to each ofyour preset stations for five seconds. The radio will goto the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons,stop for five seconds, then go on to the next presetstation. Press SCAN again to stop scanning. If a presetstation has weak reception, the radio will not stop at thepreset station.

3-15

Using RDS Mode

Your audio system is equipped with Radio Data Systems(RDS). RDS mode gives you many useful new features.When RDS is on, the radio can:

� seek only to stations with the types of programs youwant to listen to,

� seek to stations with traffic announcements,

� receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies,

� receive and display messages from radio stations and

� search for a stronger station when a station is tooweak for listening.

RDS features are only available for use on FM stationswhich broadcast RDS information.

RDS SELECT: Press this button to use thealternate RDS functions (RDS, TA, MSG, PTY and�PTY�) located on the six numbered pushbuttons.RDS SELECT: will appear on the display. The alternateRDS functions are only available when you are usingthe FM band of your radio.

RDS (1): With RDS off, press the RDS SELECT button,followed by this button to turn RDS on. The RDSdisplay will turn on. You must have RDS on to use thenew RDS functions. The RDS display will also turn onif one of the other RDS function buttons has beenpressed on. If you are tuned to a station broadcastingRDS information, the station’s call letters and ProgramType (PTY) will replace the station’s frequency on thedisplay. After five seconds, the program type will bereplaced on the display by the station’s program typename. The program type and program type name may be the same or different. Press BAND to recall thefrequency and program type displays. If the radio istuned to a station that is not broadcasting RDSinformation, the station’s frequency will remain on thedisplay. While RDS is on, the radio will search for astronger station in the network when a station gets tooweak for listening. Press the RDS SELECT button,followed by this button again to turn RDS off. All RDS functions will be turned off.

3-16

REGION: You can also us the RDS button to access theregion function. When an RDS station becomes weak,this function searches for a stronger station within thesame network. A network can span a great distance. One network can have stations spread across a countryor continent. Each network breaks down into regions.With regions, local news items like weather and trafficare available to you. When the region function is on, theradio only searches for stations in the same network andregion. You can only use the region function when RDSis already on. Press the RDS SELECT button. Thenpress and hold the RDS button for two seconds.REGION: ON will appear on the display. WhileREGION: ON appears on the display, press the RDSbutton again to turn the region function off. REGION:OFF will appear on the display. The region function canbe turned on again by pressing the RDS button.

TA (2): Press the RDS SELECT button, followed by this button to receive traffic announcements. Theradio will turn on the TA display. TP will appear on the display if the tuned station broadcasts trafficannouncements. You may also receive trafficannouncements from stations in the network related tothe tuned station. If the current tuned station does notbroadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a

station which does. When the radio finds a station whichbroadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop. If nostation is found, NONE FOUND will appear on thedisplay and the TA icon will turn off. When SEEK orSCAN is pressed with the traffic announcement functionon, the radio will only stop at stations which broadcasttraffic announcements.

While a traffic announcement plays, the radio uses aspecial type of volume called TA volume. To increaseTA volume, turn the PWR/VOL knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. TA VOLUME will appear on the display while thevolume is being adjusted.

When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radiostation or a related network station, you will hear it,even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape orcompact disc is playing. If the radio tunes to a relatednetwork station for a traffic announcement, it will return to the original station when the announcement isfinished. If the cassette tape or compact disc player wasbeing used, the tape or compact disc will stay in theplayer and resume play at the point where it stopped.

Press the RDS SELECT button, followed by this buttonagain to turn TA off.

3-17

MSG (3): When RDS is on, if the current station has amessage, MSG will appear on the display. Press theRDS SELECT button, followed by this button to see themessage. If the whole message does not appear on thedisplay, parts of the message will appear every threeseconds until the message is completed. To see the partsof the message faster than every three seconds, press thisbutton again. A new group of words will appear on thedisplay. Once the complete message has been displayed,MSG will disappear from the display until another newMSG is received.

PTY (4): This button is used to turn on and off ProgramType (PTY) seeks and scans. Press the RDS SELECTbutton, followed by this button. The PTY display willturn on. RDS SELECT: PTY NEWS will appear on thedisplay for three seconds. (The PTY shown will be thelast PTY selected.) Press the RDS SELECT button,followed by this button again to turn the PTY display off.

�PTY� (5) (6): With RDS on, press the RDSSELECT button, followed by � or �. The PTYdisplay will turn on, if it is not already on. RDSSELECT: PTY NEWS will appear on the display forthree seconds. (The PTY shown will be the last PTY selected.) While this message is displayed, use � and � to move up and down the PTY list. If youpause on a PTY for three seconds, PRESET PTY:NEWS will appear on the display. While this message isdisplayed, you can save the PTY in a preset by pressingone of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear abeep. Allow three seconds for the message to disappearif you do not want to save the PTY in a preset. See“Radio Data Systems (RDS) Program Type (PTY)Selections” in the Index.

When the PTY display is on, press SEEK and SCAN tofind radio stations of the PTY you want to listen to. Thelast PTY selected will be used for seek and scan modes.If a station with the selected PTY is not found, NONEFOUND will appear on the display. If both PTY and TAare on, the radio will search for stations with trafficannouncements and the selected PTY.

3-18

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite Program Types (PTYs).These buttons have factory PTY presets. See “RadioData Systems (RDS) Program Type (PTY) Selections”in the Index. You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 andsix FM2). Just:

1. Turn PTY on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.

3. Tune in an RDS station with the PTY you desire.

4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons formore than two seconds until you hear a beep.Whenever you press that numbered button for lessthan two seconds, the PTY you set will return.


When battery power is removed and later applied, youwill not have to reset your RDS presets because theradio remembers them.

HR or MN: Press the RDS SELECT button, followedby one of these buttons to display the time for thecurrent station. STATION TIME IS will be displayed. If a time has not been sent to the radio, NO STATIONTIME will be displayed. If you have recently tuned tothe station, you may need to wait a minute before thetime is available to the radio. To set the clock to the

current displayed station time, press and hold HR or MNuntil TIME UPDATED is displayed. There is a twosecond delay before the time is updated. RDS modedoes not have to be on to use this function, but you mustbe tuned to an FM RDS station.

ALERT: This type of announcement warns of nationalor local emergencies. You will not be able to turn offalert announcements. Alert announcements will come oneven if RDS mode is turned off. ALERT appears on thedisplay when an alert announcement plays. The radiouses TA volume during these announcements. Toincrease volume, turn the PWR/VOL knob clockwise.Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. TAVOLUME will appear on the display while the volumeis being adjusted. When an alert announcement comeson the tuned radio station or a related network station,you will hear it, even if the volume is muted or acassette tape or compact disc is playing. If the radiotunes to a related network station for an alertannouncement, it will return to the original station whenthe announcement is finished. If the cassette tape orcompact disc player is playing, play will stop for theannouncement and resume when the announcement is finished.

3-19

Setting the Tone

TONE: Press and release this button until the desiredtone control (BASS or TREBLE) is found. The radiokeeps separate tone settings for each band, preset(except weather band presets) and source.

LEVEL: After selecting the desired tone control, pressthe plus (+) or minus (-) symbol on this button to selectthe desired level.

To save the tone settings for your presets, press and holdthe numbered button for the desired preset for more thantwo seconds until you hear a beep.

Using DSP Mode

DSP: The Digital Signal Processing (DSP) feature isused to provide a choice of four different listeningexperiences: TALK, DRIVER SEAT, LIVE andAUDITORIUM. DSP can be used while listening to theradio, the cassette tape player or the CD player. Pressthis button to turn DSP on. Press and release this buttonuntil you reach the desired selection. To turn DSP off,press and hold this button until DSP OFF appears on thedisplay. When DSP OFF is displayed, the system willprovide the best overall Bose� performance. The radiokeeps separate DSP settings for each band (exceptweather band, which is always set to TALK), preset and source.

� TALK: This setting is used when listening tonon-musical material such as news, talk shows,sports broadcasts and books on tape. TALK makesspoken words sound very clear.

� DRIVER SEAT: This setting adjusts the audio togive the driver the best possible sound qualities.DRIVER SEAT can be used at any time for anymaterial. Rear seat passengers in the vehicle may notget the same effect.

� LIVE: This setting is used to enhance the stereo effect.

� AUDITORIUM: This setting is used to make thelistening space seem larger.

Adjusting the Speakers

TONE: Press and release this button until the desiredBALANCE or FADE control is found.

LEVEL: After selecting the desired BALANCE orFADE control, press the plus (+) or minus (-) symbol on this button to select the desired level.

3-20

Playing a Cassette Tape

With the radio on, insert a cassette tape. The tape willbegin playing as soon as it is inserted. When one side ofyour cassette tape is done playing, auto reverse plays theother side of your cassette tape. Cassette tapes may beloaded with the radio off but they will not start playinguntil the radio is on. If you want to insert a cassette tapewhen the ignition is off, first press the eject button.

While the tape is playing, use the VOL, TONE, LEVELand DSP controls just as you do for the radio. Othercontrols may have different functions when a tape isinserted. The display will show an underlined tapesymbol. TAPE PLAY will appear on the display when atape is playing, with an arrow to indicate which side ofthe tape is playing.

If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape, itcould be that:

� The cassette tape is tight and the cassette playercannot turn the hubs of the tape. Hold the cassettetape with the open end down and try turning the righthub counterclockwise with a pencil. Flip the tapeover and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, yourcassette tape may be damaged and should not beused in the player. Try a new tape to be sure yourplayer is working properly.

� The cassette tape is broken. (Check to see if yourtape is broken. Try a new tape.)

RW: Press the left arrow to rewind the tape rapidly. The radio will play while the tape rewinds. You may useyour station pushbuttons to tune to another radio stationwhile in RW mode. Press the left arrow again to returnto playing speed.

FF: Press the right arrow to fast forward to another partof the tape. The radio will play while the tape advances.You may use your station pushbuttons to tune to anotherradio station while in FF mode. Press the right arrowagain to return to playing speed.

TUNE SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has two positions. This button works the same, whether it ispressed to the first or second position. Press this buttonto seek to the next or previous selection on the tape.Your tape must have at least three seconds of silencebetween each selection for TUNE SEEK to work. The sound will mute while seeking.

SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections for a fewseconds. The tape will go to a selection, stop for a fewseconds, then go on to the next selection. Press thisbutton again to stop scanning.

SIDE: Press this button to change the side of the tapethat is playing.

3-21

EJECT: Press the upward triangle button to theright of the cassette tape player to remove a tape. Theradio will play. Eject may be activated with the radio offand/or the ignition off.

CLEAN TAPE: If this message appears on the display,the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will stillplay tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible toprevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care ofYour Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you cleanthe player, press and hold the eject button for threeseconds to reset the CLEAN TAPE indicator. The radiowill display CLEAN TAPE MSG CLEARED to showthat the indicator was reset.

Your cassette tape player automatically reducesbackground noise. Dolby Noise Reduction ismanufactured under a license from Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Auto CrO2 allows the cassette tape player to adjust tothe type of cassette tape for clearer sound for CrO2cassette tapes.

Playing a Compact Disc

Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer will pull it in. If the ignition and the radio are onand the underlined compact disc symbol appears on thedisplay, the disc will begin playing. Compact discs maybe loaded with the radio off but they will not startplaying until the radio is on. If you want to insert a discwhen the ignition is off, first press the eject button.

The integral CD player can play the smaller 8 cmcompact discs. Full-size compact discs and the smallercompact discs are loaded in the same manner.

If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s very hot,the disc may not play. If the disc comes out, it could be that:

� The disc is upside down.

� It is dirty, scratched or wet.

� The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and try again.)

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t becorrected, please contact your dealer.

RW: Press and hold the left arrow to reverse thecompact disc. Release it to return to playing speed.

3-22

FF: Press and hold the right arrow to fast forward toanother part of the compact disc. Release it to return toplaying speed.

TUNE SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has twopositions. This button works the same, whether it ispressed to the first or second position. Press this buttonto seek to the next or previous selection on the compact disc.

SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections for a fewseconds. The compact disc will go to a selection, stopfor a few seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press this button again to stop scanning.

RDM: Press this button to hear the tracks in random,rather than sequential, order. Press RDM again to turnoff random play.

EJECT: Press the upward triangle button to theright of the compact disc player to remove a compactdisc. The radio will play. Eject may be activated with theradio off and/or the ignition off.

Radio Data Systems (RDS) Program Type(PTY) Selections

PTY List DescriptionAdlt Hit Adult Hits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Any Any. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classicl Classical. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cls Rock Classical Rock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . College College. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Country Country. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Info Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jazz Jazz. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Language Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . News News. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nostalga Nostalgia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oldies Oldies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Persnlty Personality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Public Public. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R & B Rhythm and Blues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rel Musc Religious Music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rel Talk Religious Talk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-23

PTY List DescriptionRock M Rock Music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft Soft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft Rock Soft Rock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sports Sports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Talk Talk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top 40 Top 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weather Weather. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Factory PTY Presets

Preset FM1 FM2

Preset 1 Adult Hits Jazz

Preset 2 Classical Oldies

Preset 3 News Religious Music

Preset 4 Public Soft Rock

Preset 5 Rock R & B

Preset 6 Country Top 40

CD Adapter KitsIt is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kitwith your cassette tape player after activating the bypassfeature on your tape player.

To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:

1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.

2. Turn the radio off.

3. Press and hold the SOURCE button for two seconds.The tape symbol on the display will flash threetimes, indicating the feature is active.

4. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot.

This override routine will remain active until the ejectbutton is pressed.

Trunk-Mounted CD Changer (Option)With the compact disc changer, you can play up to 12 discs continuously. Normal size discs may be playedusing the trays supplied in the magazine. The smallerdiscs (8 cm) can be played only with specially designed trays.

3-24

NOTICE:

Objects in the trunk which may shift or slideduring driving could damage your CD changer.Protect your CD changer by using theconvenience net whenever possible. Place largeobjects in the trunk appropriately so that theywill not come into contact with the CD changer.

You must first load the magazine with discs before youcan play a compact disc. Each of the 12 trays holds onedisc. Press the button on the back of the magazine andpull gently on one of the trays. Load the trays frombottom to top, placing a disc on the tray label side down.If you load a disc label side up, the disc will not playand an error will occur. Gently push the tray back intothe magazine slot. Repeat this procedure for loading upto 12 discs in the magazine.

Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine, slideopen the door of the compact disc (CD) changer. Pushthe magazine into the changer in the direction of thearrow marked on top of the magazine.

3-25

Close the door by sliding it all the way to the left. When the door is closed, the changer will beginchecking for discs in the magazine. This will continuefor up to one and a half minutes, depending on thenumber of discs loaded.

To eject the magazine from the player, slide the CD changer door all the way open. The magazine willautomatically eject. Remember to keep the door closedwhenever possible to keep dirt and dust from gettinginside the changer.

Whenever a CD magazine with discs is loaded in thechanger, the CD changer symbol will appear on theradio display. If the CD changer is checking themagazine for CDs, the CD symbol will flash on thedisplay until the changer is ready to play. When a CD begins playing, a disc and track number will bedisplayed. The disc numbers are listed on the front of the magazine.

All of the CD functions are controlled by the radiobuttons, except for ejecting the CD magazine.

PUSHBUTTONS: Press buttons one through six toselect compact discs one through six. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a beep sounds to selectcompact discs 7 through 12. These pushbuttonsrepresent the order of the discs loaded in the changer.

DSPL: Press and hold this button to see the trackelapsed time. (This button is available on the AM-FMStereo with Cassette Tape Player only.)

REV/RW: Press and hold this button to reverse quicklythrough a track selection.

FF: Press and hold this button to advance quicklythrough a track selection.

If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo withCassette Tape Player, use SEEK-TUNE. For all otheraudio systems, use TUNE-SEEK.

3-26

SEEK-TUNE: Press the right arrow to seek to the nextselection. Press the left arrow to search for the previoustrack selection. The sound will mute while seeking.

TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has twopositions. This button works the same, whether it ispressed to the first or second position. Press this buttonto seek to the next or previous selection on the compact disc.

SCAN: Press this button. You will hear the first fewseconds of the first track on each disc. Press this buttonagain to stop scanning. (This button is available on theAM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player only.)

TRACK SCAN: Press SCAN for less than two seconds.You will hear the first few seconds of each track on adisc. Press SCAN again to stop TRACK SCAN. The CDwill mute while scanning and SCAN will appear on thedisplay. (This function is not available on the AM-FMStereo with Cassette Tape Player.)

DISC SCAN: Press SCAN for more than two seconds.You will hear the first few seconds of the first track oneach disc. Press SCAN again to stop DISC SCAN. The CD will mute while scanning and SCAN willappear on the display. (This function is not available onthe AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player.)

RDM: Press this button to hear the tracks in random,rather than sequential, order. RANDOM will appear onthe display. Press TUNE-SEEK while RDM is on thedisplay to randomly seek through discs. Press RDMagain to turn off random play. (This button is notavailable on the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player.)

SIDE: Press this button to select the next disc in thechanger. If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FMStereo with Cassette Tape Player, CD and the discnumber will appear on the display each time you pressthis button. If your vehicle is equipped with any otheraudio system, DISC LOADING will appear on thedisplay and the disc number on the radio display will goto that of the next available CD each time you press this button.

SOURCE: Press this button to select a source. Theaudio source must be loaded to play. If none of the audiosources are loaded, NO SOURCE LOADED will appearon the display. Press this button again or press BAND toswitch back to the radio. (CD will be displayed for a fewseconds instead on the AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape Player, then the radio will play.)

EJECT: Slide the CD changer door all the way openand the disc holder will automatically eject.

3-27

Compact Disc Changer Errors

CD CHANGER ERROR could be displayed for the following:

� The road is too rough. The disc should play when theroad is smoother.

� The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or loaded label side up.

� The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour andtry again.

CD CHANGER DOOR OPEN is displayed when theCD changer door is left open. (CHEK DOOR will bedisplayed instead on the AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape Player.) Completely close the changer door torestore normal operation.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, please contact your dealer.

Radio Personalization with Home and AwayFeature (If Equipped)If DRIVER 1 (HOME or AWAY) PRESETS orDRIVER 2 (HOME or AWAY) PRESETS appears in thedisplay when the radio is first turned on, your vehicle isequipped with this feature.

With this feature, your vehicle will recall the latest radiosettings as adjusted the last time your vehicle wasoperated. This feature allows two different drivers tostore and recall their own radio settings. The settingsrecalled by the radio are determined by which RKEtransmitter (“1” or “2”) was used to enter the vehicle.The number on the back of the RKE transmittercorresponds to driver 1 or to driver 2. The radio settingswill automatically adjust to where they were last set bythe identified driver. The settings can also be recalled bybriefly pressing the MEMORY seat buttons 1 or 2located on the driver’s door.

Your radio can store home and away presets. Home andaway presets allow you to use one set of preset radiosettings in the area where you live, and another set whenyou go out of town. That way, you will not need toreprogram your presets every time you travel. With theradio off and the clock displayed, use FF and RW toselect home or away presets. To select the away presets,press and hold FF for five counts until you hear a beep.The next time the radio comes on, the away presets willbe active. To select the home presets, press and hold RWfor five counts until you hear a beep. The next time theradio comes on, the home presets will be active.

3-28

When battery power is removed and later applied, youwill not have to reset your home radio presets becausethe radio remembers them. However, you will have toreset your away radio presets.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK� is designed to discourage theft of yourradio. Your vehicle has a “built-in” theft-deterrentfeature on each radio that is automatic -- there is noprogramming required. The radio in your vehicle cannotbe used in any other vehicle. When the radio wasoriginally installed in your vehicle at the factory, itstored the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Eachtime the ignition is turned on, the VIN is verified. If thevehicle’s VIN does not match the VIN stored in theradio, THEFTLOCK will be activated and the audiosystem will not play. If the radio is removed from yourvehicle, the original VIN in the radio can be used totrace the radio back to your vehicle.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

Some audio controlscan be adjusted at thesteering wheel. Theyinclude the following:

VOLUME: Press the up arrow lever to increase volumeand the down arrow lever to decrease volume.

3-29

SELECT: When listening to the radio, press the up ordown arrow lever to tune to the next or previous presetradio station. (If your vehicle is equipped with theAM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player, factorypresets which have not been reprogrammed with yourstations will be ignored). When listening to a cassettetape, the up or down arrow lever can be used to SEEKforward and rearward through the tape. Pressing the upor down arrow lever when listening to a CD will causethe player to go to the next or previous selection. Whenin Radio Data Systems (RDS) Program Type (PTY)mode, the up or down arrow lever can be used toperform a PTY preset seek. PSEEK will appear on thedisplay while the PTY preset seek is performed. Theradio will seek all of the PTYs stored in presets, exceptfor the PTY Any.

Understanding Radio Reception

AM

The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,especially at night. The longer range, however, cancause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pickup noise from things like storms and power lines. Tryreducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.

FM Stereo

FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tallbuildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causingthe sound to come and go.

Weather Band (If Equipped)

Weather band is restricted to speech and the audioquality is not as good as with the AM or FM bands.Depending on location, the radio should receive one ortwo channels.

Tips About Your Audio SystemHearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectableuntil it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to highervolumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions byadjusting the volume control on your radio to a safesound level before your hearing adapts to it.

To help avoid hearing loss or damage:

� Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.

� Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortablyand clearly.

3-30

NOTICE:

Before you add any sound equipment to yourvehicle -- like a tape player, CB radio, mobiletelephone or two-way radio -- be sure you canadd what you want. If you can, it’s veryimportant to do it properly. Added soundequipment may interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s engine, radio or other systems, andeven damage them. Your vehicle’s systems mayalso interfere with the operation of soundequipment that has been added improperly.So, before adding sound equipment, check withyour dealer and be sure to check Federal rulescovering mobile radio and telephone units.

Care of Your Cassette Tape PlayerA tape player that is not cleaned regularly can causereduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damagedmechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in theircases away from contaminants, direct sunlight andextreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operateproperly or may cause failure of the tape player.

Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN orCLEAN TAPE to indicate that you have used your tapeplayer for 50 hours without resetting the tape cleantimer. If this message appears on the display, yourcassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still playtapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible toprevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice areduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette tosee if it is the tape or the tape player at fault. If this othercassette has no improvement in sound quality, clean thetape player.

The recommended cleaning method for your cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action,non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrubthe tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.The recommended cleaning cassette is available throughyour dealership (GM Part No. 12344789).

3-31

When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaningcassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject becauseyour unit is equipped with a cut tape detection featureand a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape. To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected, use the following steps.

1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.

2. Turn the radio off.

3. Press and hold the SOURCE button for two seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flashthree times.

4. Turn the radio on and insert the scrubbing actioncleaning cassette.

5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’srecommended cleaning time.

When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tapedetection feature is active again.

You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-typecleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to cleanthe tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will noteject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner maynot clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaningcassette is not recommended.

If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo withCassette Tape Player, press and hold the eject button forfive seconds to reset the CLN indicator after you cleanthe player. The radio will display --- to show theindicator was reset.

If your vehicle is equipped with any other radio, pressand hold the eject button for three seconds to reset theCLEAN TAPE indicator after you clean the player. The radio will display CLEAN TAPE MSG CLEAREDto show the indicator was reset.

Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality maydegrade over time. Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced.

Care of Your Compact DiscsHandle discs carefully. Store them in their original casesor other protective cases and away from direct sunlightand dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution andclean it, wiping from the center to the edge.

Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handlingdiscs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

3-32

Care of Your Compact Disc PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due tothe risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics withlubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

Power Antenna Mast CareYour power antenna will look its best and work well if it’s cleaned from time to time. To clean the antenna mast:

1. Turn on the ignition and radio to raise the antenna.

2. Dampen a clean cloth with mineral spirits orequivalent solvent.

3. Wipe the cloth over the mast sections, removing any dirt.

4. Wipe dry with a clean cloth.

5. Make the antenna go up and down by turning theradio or ignition off and on.

6. Repeat if necessary.

NOTICE:

Don’t lubricate the power antenna. Lubricationcould damage it.

NOTICE:

Before entering an automatic car wash, turn offyour radio to make the power antenna go down.This will prevent the mast from possibly gettingdamaged. If the antenna does not go down whenyou turn the radio off, it may be damaged orneed to be cleaned. In either case, lower theantenna by hand by carefully pressing theantenna down.

If the mast portion of your antenna is damaged, you caneasily replace it. See your dealer for a replacement kitand follow the instructions in the kit.

4-4-1

Section 4 Your Driving and the Road

Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve alsoincluded many other useful tips on driving.

4-2 Defensive Driving4-3 Drunken Driving4-6 Control of a Vehicle4-6 Braking4-10 Steering4-12 Off-Road Recovery4-13 Passing4-14 Loss of Control4-15 Driving at Night4-17 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

4-20 City Driving4-21 Freeway Driving4-22 Before Leaving on a Long Trip4-23 Highway Hypnosis4-23 Hill and Mountain Roads4-25 Winter Driving4-29 Recreational Vehicle Towing4-29 Loading Your Vehicle4-31 Towing a Trailer

4-2

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device in yourvehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)

Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means“always expect the unexpected.”

Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do. Be ready for their mistakes.

Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enoughfollowing distance. It’s the best defensive drivingmaneuver, in both city and rural driving. You neverknow when the vehicle in front of you is going to brakeor turn suddenly.

Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate onthe driving task. Anything that distracts from the drivingtask -- such as concentrating on a cellular telephonecall, reading, or reaching for something on the floor -- makes proper defensive driving more difficultand can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving techniques could saveyour life.

4-3

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor tothe highway death toll, claiming thousands of victimsevery year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle:

� Judgment

� Muscular Coordination

� Vision

� Attentiveness.

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,these deaths are the result of someone who was drinkingand driving. In recent years, over 17,000 annual motorvehicle-related deaths have been associated with the useof alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adultpopulation -- choose never to drink alcohol, so theynever drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’sagainst the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.There are good medical, psychological anddevelopmental reasons for these laws.

The obvious way to solve the leading highway safetyproblem is for people never to drink alcohol and thendrive. But what if people do? How much is “too much”if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than manymight think. Although it depends on each person and situation, here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someonewho is drinking depends upon four things:

� The amount of alcohol consumed

� The drinker’s body weight

� The amount of food that is consumed before andduring drinking

� The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol.

According to the American Medical Association, a180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with aBAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach thesame BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glassesof wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.

4-4

It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, ifthe same person drank three double martinis (3 ouncesor 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’sBAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person whoconsumes food just before or during drinking will have asomewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Women generally havea lower relative percentage of body water than men.Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that awoman generally will reach a higher BAC level than aman of her same body weight when each has the samenumber of drinks.

The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BACof 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, andthroughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In someother countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for allcommercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

4-5

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills ofmany people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. Alldrivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.Statistics show that the chance of being in a collisionincreases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having acollision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance ofthis driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at alevel of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcoholin one drink. No amount of coffee or number of coldshowers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t theright answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need totake sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might not be ableto react quickly enough to avoid the collision.

There’s something else about drinking and driving thatmany people don’t know. Medical research shows thatalcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuriesworse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord orheart. This means that when anyone who has beendrinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, thatperson’s chance of being killed or permanently disabledis higher than if the person had not been drinking.

CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness andjudgment can be affected by even a small amountof alcohol. You can have a serious -- or even fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking.Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driverwho has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you’re with a group, designate a driver whowill not drink.

4-6

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle go whereyou want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering andthe accelerator. All three systems have to do their workat the places where the tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle.(Also see “Traction Control System” in the Index.)

BrakingBraking action involves perception time and reaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up yourfoot and do it. That’s reaction time.

Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. Butthat’s only an average. It might be less with one driverand as long as two or three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordinationand eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs andfrustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehiclemoving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space between your vehicle and othersis important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatlywith the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement orgravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tiretread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of thevehicle and the amount of brake force applied.

4-7

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive inspurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to coolbetween hard stops. Your brakes will wear out muchfaster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pacewith the traffic and allow realistic following distances,you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. Thatmeans better braking and longer brake life.

If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brakenormally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, thepedal may get harder to push down. If your enginestops, you will still have some power brake assist. Butyou will use it when you brake. Once the power assist isused up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.

Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is anadvanced electronic braking system that will helpprevent a braking skid.

When you start your engine and begin to drive away,your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You mayhear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this testis going on, and you may even notice that your brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there’s a problem with theanti-lock brake system, thiswarning light will stay on.See “Anti-Lock BrakeSystem Warning Light” inthe Index.

Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out infront of you.

4-8

You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS.

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If oneof the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer willseparately work the brakes at each front wheel and atboth rear wheels.

The anti-lock system can change the brake pressurefaster than any driver could. The computer isprogrammed to make the most of available tire and road conditions.

You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates onwheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.

Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you needto get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle infront of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakesif that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leaveenough room up ahead to stop, even though you haveanti-lock brakes.

Using Anti-Lock

Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal downfirmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may hear theanti-lock pump or motor operate, and feel the brakepedal pulsate, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help you morethan even the very best braking.

4-9

Traction Control SystemYour vehicle has a traction control system that limitswheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery roadconditions. The system operates only if it senses that oneor both of the front wheels are spinning or beginning tolose traction. When this happens, the system works thefront brakes and reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.

The TRACTION ENGAGED message will display onthe Driver Information Center when the traction controlsystem is limiting wheel spin. See “Driver InformationCenter Messages” in the Index. You may feel or hear thesystem working, but this is normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the tractioncontrol system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage. When roadconditions allow you to safely use it again, you mayreengage the cruise control. (See “Cruise Control” in the Index.)

This warning light will come on to let you know if there’s a problem with your traction control system.

See “Traction Control System Warning Light” in theIndex. When this warning light is on, the system will notlimit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

The traction control system automatically comes onwhenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,especially in slippery road conditions, you shouldalways leave the system on. But you can turn thetraction control system off if you ever need to. (You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow. See “Rocking Your Vehicle” in the Index.)

4-10

To turn the system off,press the TRAC OFFbutton located insidethe glove box.

The TRACTION OFF message will display on theDriver Information Center. If the system is limitingwheel spin when you press the button, the TRACTIONOFF message will display -- but the system won’t turnoff right away. It will wait until there’s no longer acurrent need to limit wheel spin.

You can turn the system back on at any time by pressingthe button again. The TRACTION READY messageshould display briefly on the Driver Information Center.

SteeringPower SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because the enginestops or the system is not functioning, you can steer butit will take much more effort.

Magnasteer�

This system continuously adjusts the effort you feelwhen steering at all vehicle speeds. It provides easewhen parking yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds.

Steering Tips

Driving on Curves

It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned onthe news happen on curves. Here’s why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject tothe same laws of physics when driving on curves. Thetraction of the tires against the road surface makes itpossible for the vehicle to change its path when you turnthe front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keepthe vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve evertried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.

4-11

The traction you can get in a curve depends on thecondition of your tires and the road surface, the angle atwhich the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’rein a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.

Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet the road. Adding thesudden acceleration can demand too much of thoseplaces. You can lose control. Refer to “Traction Control System” in the Index.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on theaccelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want itto go, and slow down.

If you have Stabilitrak�, you may see the STABILITYENGAGED message on the Driver Information Center.See “Stability Engaged Message” in the Index.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you shouldadjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds arebased on good weather and road conditions. Under lessfavorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approach acurve, do it before you enter the curve, while your frontwheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until you are out of the curve, and thenaccelerate gently into the straightaway.

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be more effective thanbraking. For example, you come over a hill and find atruck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls outfrom nowhere, or a child darts out from between parkedcars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid theseproblems by braking -- if you can stop in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. That’s thetime for evasive action -- steering around the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies likethese. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking inEmergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better toremove as much speed as you can from a possiblecollision. Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

4-12

An emergency like this requires close attention and aquick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel atthe recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you canturn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removingeither hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, andjust as quickly straighten the wheel once you haveavoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

Off -Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have dropped off theedge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off theaccelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steerso that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turnuntil the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Thenturn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

4-13

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goesback into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lanehighway is a potentially dangerous move, since thepassing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncomingtraffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error injudgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger cansuddenly put the passing driver face to face with theworst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

� “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns. If you have any doubtwhatsoever about making a successful pass, wait for a better time.

� Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate aturn or an intersection, delay your pass. A brokencenter line usually indicates it’s all right to pass(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solidline on your side of the lane or a double solid line,even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.

� Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to passwhile you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,following too closely reduces your area of vision,especially if you’re following a larger vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if the vehicleahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back areasonable distance.

� When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’tget too close. Time your move so you will beincreasing speed as the time comes to move into theother lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a“running start” that more than makes up for thedistance you would lose by dropping back. And ifsomething happens to cause you to cancel your pass,you need only slow down and drop back again andwait for another opportunity.

� If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, waityour turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying topass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.Remember to glance over your shoulder and checkthe blind spot.

4-14

� Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and startyour left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane. (Remember that your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is.)

� Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time ontwo-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next vehicle.

� Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it maybe slowing down or starting to turn.

� If you’re being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps youcan ease a little to the right.

Loss of ControlLet’s review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems (brakes, steeringand acceleration) don’t have enough friction where thetires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.

In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer andconstantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions, and by not“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’sthree control systems. In the braking skid, your wheelsaren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, toomuch speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, toomuch throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

Remember: Any traction control system helps avoidonly the acceleration skid.

If your traction control system is off, then anacceleration skid is also best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want thevehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, yourvehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for asecond skid if it occurs.

4-15

If you have Stabilitrak�, you may see the STABILITYENGAGED message on the Driver Information Center.See “Stability Engaged Message” in the Index.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’llwant to slow down and adjust your driving to theseconditions. It is important to slow down on slipperysurfaces because stopping distance will be longer andvehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration orbraking (including engine braking by shifting to a lowergear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.You may not realize the surface is slippery until yourvehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow onthe road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow down when you have any doubt.

Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helpsavoid only the braking skid.

Driving at Night

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night visionproblems, or by fatigue.

4-16

Here are some tips on night driving.

� Drive defensively.

� Don’t drink and drive.

� Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slowdown and keep more space between you and other vehicles.

� Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Yourheadlamps can light up only so much road ahead.

� In remote areas, watch for animals.

� If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But aswe get older these differences increase. A 50-year-olddriver may require at least twice as much light to see thesame thing at night as a 20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect your nightvision. For example, if you spend the day in brightsunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes willhave less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’redriving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cutdown on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lotof things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, or even severalseconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver whodoesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle withmisaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staringdirectly into the approaching headlamps.

Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicleclean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made muchworse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glasscan build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makeslights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that your headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as your headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyesbe examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from nightblindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and aren’teven aware of it.

4-17

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wetroad, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well becauseyour tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll geteven less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and becautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexesare tuned for driving on dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if yourwindshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy raincan make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,pavement markings, the edge of the road and evenpeople walking.

It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment ingood shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiperinserts when they show signs of streaking or missingareas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.

4-18

Driving too fast through large water puddles or evengoing through some car washes can cause problems, too.The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.

CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t workas well in a quick stop and may cause pulling toone side. You could lose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle of water ora car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly untilyour brakes work normally.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build upunder your tires that they can actually ride on the water.This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’regoing fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,it has little or no contact with the road.

Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if yourtires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one ormore is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing onthe road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephonepoles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” thewater’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. Therejust isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. Thebest advice is to slow down when it is raining.

4-19

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

NOTICE:

If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water, water can come in throughyour engine’s air intake and badly damage yourengine. Never drive through water that is slightlylower than the underbody of your vehicle. If youcan’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drivethrough them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. If you try to drive through flowing water, as youmight at a low water crossing, your vehicle can be carried away. As little as six inches of flowingwater can carry away a smaller vehicle. If thishappens, you and other vehicle occupants coulddrown. Don’t ignore police warning signs, andotherwise be very cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips� Besides slowing down, allow some extra following

distance. And be especially careful when you passanother vehicle. Allow yourself more clear roomahead, and be prepared to have your view restrictedby road spray.

� Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See “Tires” in the Index.)

4-20

City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is theamount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out forwhat the other drivers are doing and pay attention totraffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

� Know the best way to get to where you are going.Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknownpart of the city just as you would for a cross-country trip.

� Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross mostlarge cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See thenext part, “Freeway Driving.”)

� Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic lightis there because the corner is busy enough to need it.When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running thered light.

4-21

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safestof all roads. But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keepup with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the samespeed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast ortoo-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat theleft lane on a freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to thefreeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as youdrive along the entrance ramp, you should begin tocheck traffic. Try to determine where you expect toblend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close tothe prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, checkyour mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often asnecessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to theposted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stayin the right lane unless you want to pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then useyour turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over yourshoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your“blind” spot.

4-22

Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain youallow a reasonable following distance. Expect to moveslightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to the properlane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not,under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on tothe next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.

The exit speed is usually posted.

Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for any distanceat higher speeds, you may tend to think you are goingslower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If youmust start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’swork -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first partof the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes youcan easily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needsservice, have it done before starting out. Of course,you’ll find experienced and able service experts inCadillac dealerships all across North America. They’llbe ready and willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

� Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

� Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

� Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checkedall levels?

� Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?

� Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough forlong-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to therecommended pressure?

� Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlookalong your route? Should you delay your trip a shorttime to avoid a major storm system?

� Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

4-23

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call ithighway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of road withthe same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on theroad, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the windagainst the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let ithappen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave theroad in less than a second, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

� Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with acomfortably cool interior.

� Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and tothe sides. Check your rearview mirrors and yourinstruments frequently.

� If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, serviceor parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, orboth. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway asan emergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different fromdriving in flat or rolling terrain.

4-24

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’replanning to visit there, here are some tips that can makeyour trips safer and more enjoyable.

� Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluidlevels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system andtransaxle. These parts can work hard on mountain roads.

� Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some of theslowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you godown a steep or long hill.

CAUTION:

If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get sohot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to letyour engine assist your brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with theignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have todo all the work of slowing down. They could getso hot that they wouldn’t work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or even none going downa hill. You could crash. Always have your enginerunning and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.

� Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and transaxle, and you can climb the hill better.

� Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cutacross the center of the road. Drive at speeds that letyou stay in your own lane.

� As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.

� You may see highway signs on mountains that warn ofspecial problems. Examples are long grades, passing orno-passing zones, a falling rocks area or windingroads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.

4-25

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

� Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

� You may want to put winter emergency supplies inyour trunk.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supplyof windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outerclothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and acouple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you willbe driving under severe conditions, include a small bagof sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bagsto help provide traction. Be sure you properly securethese items in your vehicle.

4-26

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where your tires meet theroad probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between your tires andthe road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’llhave a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be very careful.

What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wetice can be even more trouble because it may offer theleast traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s aboutfreezing (32�F; 0�C) and freezing rain begins to fall.Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crewscan get there.

Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowingor loose snow -- drive with caution.

Keep your traction control system on. It improves yourability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road.Even though your vehicle has a traction control system,you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to theroad conditions. See “Traction Control System” in the Index.

4-27

Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stabilitywhen you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Eventhough you have the anti-lock braking system, you’llwant to begin stopping sooner than you would on drypavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.

� Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.

� Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fineuntil you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On anotherwise clear road, ice patches may appear inshaded areas where the sun can’t reach: aroundclumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass mayremain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake beforeyou are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actuallyon the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.

If You’re Caught in a Blizzard

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in aserious situation. You should probably stay with yourvehicle unless you know for sure that you are near helpand you can hike through the snow. Here are somethings to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

� Turn on your hazard flashers.

4-28

� Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police thatyou’ve been stopped by the snow.

� Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make bodyinsulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats -- anything you can wrap around yourself ortuck under your clothing to keep warm.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gasto get inside. CO could overcome you and killyou. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle, especially anythat is blocking your exhaust pipe. And checkaround again from time to time to be sure snowdoesn’t collect there.Open a window just a little on the side of thevehicle that’s away from the wind. This will helpkeep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This savesfuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little fasterthan just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. Thisuses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps thebattery charged. You will need a well-charged battery torestart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later onwith your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

4-29

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almostall the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine againand repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortablefrom the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve thefuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can getout of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

Recreational Vehicle TowingYour vehicle was not designed to be towed with all fourwheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.

NOTICE:

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on theground will damage drivetrain components.

Loading Your Vehicle

Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight itmay properly carry. The Tire-Loading Information labelfound on the rear edge of the driver’s door tells you theproper size, speed rating and recommended inflationpressures for the tires on your vehicle. It also gives youimportant information about the number of people thatcan be in your vehicle and the total weight that you cancarry. This weight is called the Vehicle Capacity Weightand includes the weight of all occupants, cargo and alloptions not installed in the factory.

4-30

The other label is the Certification label, found on therear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the grossweight capacity of your vehicle, called the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the frontor rear axle.

If you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out.Don’t carry more than 176 lbs. (80 kg) in your trunk.

CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than theGVWR, or either the maximum front or rearGAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle canbreak, and it can change the way your vehiclehandles. These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shorten the lifeof your vehicle.

NOTICE:

Your warranty does not cover parts orcomponents that fail because of overloading.

If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases,tools, packages, or anything else -- they will go as fastas the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.

4-31

CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle can strike andinjure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.

� Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In atrunk, put them as far forward as you can.Try to spread the weight evenly.

� Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so that some of them areabove the tops of the seats.

� Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint inyour vehicle.

� When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

Electronic Level ControlThis feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level as theload changes. It’s automatic -- you don’t need to adjust anything.

Towing a Trailer

CAUTION:

If you don’t use the correct equipment and driveproperly, you can lose control when you pull atrailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not work well -- or even at all.You and your passengers could be seriouslyinjured. You may also damage your vehicle; theresulting repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Pull a trailer only if you have followedall the steps in this section. Ask your dealer foradvice and information about towing a trailerwith your vehicle.

4-32

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with theproper trailer towing equipment. To identify what thevehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, youshould read the information in “Weight of the Trailer”that appears later in this section. But trailering isdifferent than just driving your vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes in handling, durability andfuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correctequipment, and it has to be used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.Many of these are important for your safety and that ofyour passengers. So please read this section carefullybefore you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harderagainst the drag of the added weight. The engine isrequired to operate at relatively higher speeds and undergreater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more, thetrailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasingthe pulling requirements.

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

� There are many different laws, including speed limitrestrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sureyour rig will be legal, not only where you live butalso where you’ll be driving. A good source for thisinformation can be state or provincial police.

� Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitchdealer about sway controls.

� Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,axle or other parts could be damaged.

� Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) anddon’t make starts at full throttle. This helps yourengine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at theheavier loads.

� Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speedfor trailers (or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h)) tosave wear on your vehicle’s parts.

Three important considerations have to do with weight:� the weight of the trailer,

� the weight of the trailer tongue

� and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.

4-33

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg).This is the total maximum weight, including the load.But even that can be too heavy.

The maximum trailer weight for your vehicle can bedetermined from the Gross Combined Vehicle Weight(GCVW). The GCVW = curb weight + passenger’sweight + cargo weight + trailer weight. The GCVWshould never weigh more than 5, 900 lbs. (2 679 kg)total loaded vehicle and trailer.

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. Forexample, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull atrailer are all important. And, it can also depend on anyspecial equipment that you have on your vehicle.

You can ask your dealer for our trailering information oradvice, or you can write us at:

Cadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 436004Pontiac, MI 48343-6004

In Canada, write to:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre1908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the total or grossweight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, anycargo you may carry in it, and the people who will beriding in the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you mustadd the tongue load to the GVW because your vehiclewill be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading YourVehicle” in the Index for more information about yourvehicle’s maximum load capacity.

4-34

If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailertongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight (B). If you have a weight-distributinghitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent ofthe total loaded trailer weight (B).

After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer andthen the tongue, separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them rightsimply by moving some items around in the trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upperlimit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on theTire-Loading Information label at the rear edge of thedriver’s door or see “Loading Your Vehicle” in theIndex. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.

HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are afew reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here aresome rules to follow:

� The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mountedhitch that does not attach to the bumper.

� Will you have to make any holes in the body of yourvehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do,then be sure to seal the holes later when you removethe hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbonmonoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into yourvehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index). Dirt and water can, too.

4-35

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between your vehicleand your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongueof the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the roadif it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructionsabout safety chains may be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow themanufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safetychains and do not attach them to the bumper. Alwaysleave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesBecause you have anti-lock brakes, don’t try to tap intoyour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you do, bothbrake systems won’t work well, or at all.

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to getto know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel ofhandling and braking with the added weight of thetrailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving andthen apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be surethe brakes are working. This lets you check yourelectrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that theload is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakesare still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as youwould when driving your vehicle without a trailer. Thiscan help you avoid situations that require heavy brakingand sudden turns.

PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up ahead whenyou’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond thepassed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

4-36

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that handto the left. To move the trailer to the right, move yourhand to the right. Always back up slowly and, ifpossible, have someone guide you.

Making Turns

NOTICE:

Making very sharp turns while trailering couldcause the trailer to come in contact with thevehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoidmaking very sharp turns while trailering.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turnsthan normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need adifferent turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Checkwith your dealer. The arrows on your instrument panelwill flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash,telling other drivers you’re about to turn, change lanesor stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrumentpanel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailerare burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind youare seeing your signal when they are not. It’s importantto check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.

Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you startdown a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shiftdown, you might have to use your brakes so much thatthey would get hot and no longer work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce yourspeed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) or less to reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.

4-37

Parking on Hills

CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle, with atrailer attached, on a hill. If something goeswrong, your rig could start to move. People canbe injured, and both your vehicle and the trailercan be damaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’show to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into PARK (P).

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release theregular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then shift into PARK (P) firmly and apply your parking brake.

5. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down

while you:

� Start your engine;

� Shift into a gear; and

� Be sure the parking brake has released.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.

4-38

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often when you’repulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule bookletfor more on this. Things that are especially important intrailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’toverfill), engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and brakesystem. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to reviewthis information before you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingYour cooling system may temporarily overheat duringsevere operating conditions. See “Engine Overheating”in the Index.

5-5-1

Section 5 Problems on the Road

Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.

5-2 Hazard Warning Flashers5-3 Other Warning Devices5-3 Jump Starting5-9 Towing Your Vehicle5-9 Engine Overheating

5-12 Cooling System5-18 If a Tire Goes Flat5-19 Changing a Flat Tire5-29 Compact Spare Tire5-31 If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow

5-2

Hazard Warning Flashers

Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. Theyalso let police know you have a problem. Your front andrear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

Press the button in to make your front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off.

This light on the instrumentpanel will flash, indicatingthat the hazard warningflashers are on.

The hazard warning flashers will work once the buttonis pressed in regardless of the ignition key position.

5-3

Pull out on the collar to turn the flashers off. When thehazard warning flashers are on, the turn signals won’twork since they are already flashing.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up atthe side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.

Jump StartingIf your battery has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumper cables to start yourvehicle. Please follow the steps below to do it safely.

CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because:� They contain acid that can burn you.� They contain gas that can explode or ignite.� They contain enough electricity to burn you.

If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you.

5-4

NOTICE:

Ignoring these steps could result in costly damageto your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

The ACDelco� battery in your vehicle has abuilt -in hydrometer. Do not charge, test or jumpstart the battery if the hydrometer looks clear orlight yellow. Replace the battery when there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a cranking complaint.Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pullingit won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-voltbattery with a negative ground system.

NOTICE:

If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cablescan reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touchingeach other. If they are, it could cause a groundconnection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able tostart your vehicle, and the bad grounding coulddamage the electrical systems.

NOTICE:

To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Put anautomatic transaxle in PARK (P).

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarettelighter. Turn off all lamps that aren’t needed as wellas radios. This will avoid sparks and help save bothbatteries. In addition, it could save your radio!

NOTICE:

If you leave you or radio on, it could be badlydamaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered byyour warranty.

5-5

4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find thepositive (+) and negative (-) terminals on each battery.

CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from any underhoodelectric fan.

5. Start by removingthe red positive (+)terminal cover.

CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause batterygas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight ifyou need more light.Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’tneed to add water to the ACDelco� batteryinstalled in every new GM vehicle. But if abattery has filler caps, be sure the right amountof fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take careof that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flush the place withwater and get medical help immediately.

5-6

6. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose ormissing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.The vehicles could also be damaged.

Before you connect the cables, here are some basicthings you should know. Positive (+) will go topositive (+) and negative (-) will go to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part. Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you will get a shortthat would damage the battery and maybe otherparts, too. Also, don’t connect negative (-) to negative (-).

CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injure youbadly. Keep your hands away from moving partsonce the engine is running.

7. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery.

5-7

8. Don’t let the other endof the positive (+) cabletouch metal. Connect it to the positive (+)terminal of the good battery.

9. Now connect the blacknegative (-) cable to the good battery’snegative (-) terminal.

Don’t let the other end of the negative (-) cable touchanything until the next step. The other end of thenegative (-) cable doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goesto a heavy unpainted metal part on the engine of thevehicle with the dead battery.

5-8

10. Attach the cable at least18 inches (46 cm) awayfrom the dead battery,but not near engineparts that move. Theelectrical connection isjust as good there, butthe chance of sparksgetting back to thebattery is much less.

11. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and runthe engine for awhile.

12. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs service.

13. Remove the cables in reverse order to preventelectrical shorting. Take care that they don’t toucheach other or any other metal.

A. Heavy Metal Engine Part

B. Good Battery

C. Dead Battery

5-9

Towing Your Vehicle

CAUTION:

To help avoid serious personal injury to you or others:� Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is

being towed.� Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds.� Never tow with damaged parts not

fully secured.� Never get under your vehicle after it has

been lifted by the tow truck.� Always secure the vehicle on each side with

separate safety chains when towing it.� Use only the correct hooks.

NOTICE:

Use the proper towing equipment to avoiddamage to the bumper, fascia or fog lamp areasof the vehicle.

With current trends in automotive styles and design, it isessential that the correct towing equipment is used totow a vehicle. Your vehicle can be towed with wheel-liftor car-carrier equipment.

Consult your dealer or a professional towing service ifyou need to have your vehicle towed. See “RoadsideAssistance” in the Index.

Engine OverheatingYou will find an ENGINE COOLANT HOT, IDLEENGINE message or an ENGINE OVERHEATED,STOP ENGINE message on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). You will also hear a chime. There is alsoan engine temperature warning light and/or gage on theinstrument panel. See “Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light” or “Engine Coolant Temperature Gage”in the Index.

5-10

Overheated Engine Protection Operating ModeShould an overheated engine condition exist and themessage ENGINE OVERHEATED, STOP ENGINE isdisplayed, an overheat protection mode which alternatesfiring groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage.In this mode, you will notice a loss in power and engineperformance. This operating mode allows your vehicleto be driven to a safe place in an emergency; you maydrive up to 50 miles (80 km). Towing a trailer in theoverheat protection mode should be avoided.

NOTICE:

After driving in the overheated engine protectionoperating mode, to avoid engine damage, allowthe engine to cool before attempting any repair.The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repairthe cause of coolant loss, change the oil and resetthe oil life indicator. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood.


5-11


If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You orothers could be badly burned. Stop your engine ifit overheats, and get out of the vehicle until theengine is cool. See “Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode” in the Index.

NOTICE:

If your engine catches fire because you keepdriving with no coolant, your vehicle can bebadly damaged. The costly repairs would not becovered by your warranty. See “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index.

If No Steam Is Coming From Your EngineIf you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear nosteam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimesthe engine can get a little too hot when you:

� Climb a long hill on a hot day.

� Stop after high-speed driving.

� Idle for long periods in traffic.

� Tow a trailer.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,try this for a minute or so:

1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.

2. Dial temperature control to the highest heat settingand open the windows, as necessary.

3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);otherwise, shift to the highest gear while driving -- OVERDRIVE (�) or THIRD (3).

5-12

If you no longer have the overheat warning, you candrive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park yourvehicle right away.

If there’s still no sign of steam, idle the engine for three minutes while you’re parked. If you still have thewarning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode” listed previously inthis section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to get servicehelp right away.

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s whatyou’ll see:

A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap

B. Electric Engine Fans

5-13

CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under the hood canstart up even when the engine is not running andcan injure you. Keep hands, clothing and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,don’t do anything else until it cools down.

A low coolant level should be indicated by a CHECKCOOLANT LEVEL message on the Driver InformationCenter. If it is, you may have a leak in the radiatorhoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhereelse in the cooling system.

CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engineparts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you runthe engine, it could lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and you could be burned.Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.

NOTICE:

Engine damage from running your enginewithout coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.See “Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode” in the Index.

5-14

NOTICE:

When adding coolant, it is important that you use only DEX-COOL� (silicate-free) coolant.If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to the system, premature engine, heater core orradiator corrosion may result. In addition, theengine coolant will require change sooner -- at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX-COOL� is notcovered by your new vehicle warranty.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to see if the electric engine cooling fans arerunning. If the engine is overheating, both fans shouldbe running. If they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.

How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge TankIf you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant levelisn’t at the proper level (2.5 inches (6.4 cm) below thebase of the fill neck), add a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL� coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system,including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is coolbefore you do it. (See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for more information.)

CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot coolingsystem can blow out and burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turn the coolant surgetank pressure cap -- even a little -- they can comeout at high speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the coolant surge tankpressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling systemand coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if youever have to turn the pressure cap.

5-15

CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain water, or some otherliquid like alcohol, can boil before the propercoolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolantwarning system is set for the proper coolantmixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,



your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’tget the overheat warning. Your engine couldcatch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable waterand DEX-COOL� coolant.

NOTICE:

In cold weather, water can freeze and crack theengine, radiator, heater core and other parts. So use the recommended coolant.

CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

5-16

1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise (left) until it first stops. (Don’t press down while turning the pressure cap.)

If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss meansthere is still some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the cap, but now push down asyou turn it. Remove the pressure cap.

5-17

3. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the propermixture, to the base of the filler neck.

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upperradiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the enginecooling fans.

By this time, the coolant level inside the coolantsurge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, addmore of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tankuntil the level reaches about 2.5 inches (6.4 cm)below the base of the filler neck.

5-18

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the arrows onthe pressure cap line up like this.

Start the engine and allow it to warm up. If the CHECKCOOLANT LEVEL message does not appear on theDriver Information Center, coolant is at the proper filllevel. If a CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message doesappear, repeat Steps 1 to 3 and reinstall the pressure capor see your dealer.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goesout of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a fewtips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake toa stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like askid and may require the same correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control bysteering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may bevery bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use yourjacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

5-19

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damageby driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazardwarning flashers.

CAUTION:

Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehiclecan slip off the jack and roll over you or otherpeople. You and they could be badly injured.Find a level place to change your tire. To helpprevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).2. Set the parking brake firmly.3. Turn off the engine.

To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move,you can put blocks at the front and rear of thetire farthest away from the one being changed.That would be the tire on the other side of thevehicle, at the opposite end.

The following steps will tell you how to use the jack andchange a tire.

5-20

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools

The equipment you’ll need is in the trunk. Pull thecarpeting from the floor of the trunk. Turn the retainer (center dial) on the compact spare covercounterclockwise to remove it. Lift and remove thecover. (See “Compact Spare Tire” in the Index for more information about the compact spare.)

Lift up the tire to remove it from the trunk.

5-21

Turn the nut holding the jack and wheel wrenchcounterclockwise and remove it. Then remove the jackand wrench.

The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) and thewheel wrench (B).

5-22

Removing the Wheel Cover

There is a center wheel cover on the aluminum wheel.Using the flat end of the wheel wrench, gently pry thewheel cover off. Be careful not to scratch the aluminumwheel edge and don’t try to remove it with your hands.

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing theSpare Tire

1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.Don’t remove them yet.

5-23

Find the jacking location from the diagram aboveand corresponding cutouts in the plastic molding.

CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up isdangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed. Never get undera vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

5-24

CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperlypositioned can damage the vehicle and even makethe vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury andvehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raising the vehicle.

2. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack. Turn the wheelwrench counterclockwise to lower the jack lift headuntil the jack fits under the vehicle.

3. Position the jack under the vehicle and raise the jacklift head until it fits firmly into the notch in thevehicle’s frame nearest the flat tire.

4. Put the compact spare tire near you.

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrenchclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off theground so that the flat tire can be removed and thespare tire will fit on the wheel mounting surface.

6. Remove all wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.

5-25

7. Remove any rust or dirtfrom the wheel bolts,mounting surfaces andspare wheel.

CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make the wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. When you change awheel, remove any rust or dirt from the placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towelto do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wirebrush later, if you need to, to get all the rust ordirt off.

CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If youdo, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel couldfall off, causing a serious accident.

8. Place the spare onthe wheel-mountingsurface.

5-26

9. Replace the wheel nutswith the rounded end of the nuts toward thewheel. Tighten each nutby hand until the wheelis held against the hub.

10. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

5-27

11. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequenceas shown.

CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightenedwheel nuts can cause the wheel to become looseand even come off. This could lead to an accident.Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you haveto replace them, be sure to get new GM originalequipment wheel nuts.Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 100 lb-ft (140 N·m).

NOTICE:

Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead tobrake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoidexpensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheelnuts in the proper sequence and to the propertorque specification.

Don’t try to put a wheel cover on your compact sparetire. It won’t fit. Store the wheel cover in the trunkuntil you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.

NOTICE:

Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on your compactspare, you could damage the cover or thecompact spare.

5-28

Storing the Flat Tire and Tools

CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in thepassenger compartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, looseequipment could strike someone. Store all thesein the proper place.

After you’ve put the compact spare tire on your vehicle,you’ll need to store the flat tire in your trunk. Put the flattire in the trunk so the side that faces out when it is onthe vehicle is facing down. The full-size tire will not fitdown into the well. Place it so the front is in the welland the rear is out of the well.

Secure the tire with the retainer that was used to hold thecompact spare in place. Store the cover as far forward as possible.

5-29

Storing the Spare Tire and Tools

CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in thepassenger compartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, looseequipment could strike someone. Store all thesein the proper place.

The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replacethe compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon as youcan. See the storage instructions label to replace yourcompact spare into your trunk properly.

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflated whenyour vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

5-30

After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you should stop as soon as possible and make sure your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spareis made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),so you can finish your trip and have your full-size tirerepaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s bestto replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon as youcan. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape incase you need it again.

NOTICE:

When the compact spare is installed, don’t takeyour vehicle through an automatic car wash withguide rails. The compact spare can get caught onthe rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,and maybe other parts of your vehicle.

Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.

And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel withother wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your sparetire and its wheel together.

NOTICE:

Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Usingthem can damage your vehicle and can damagethe chains too. Don’t use tire chains on yourcompact spare.

5-31

If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you willneed to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin yourwheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” canhelp you get out when you’re stuck, but you must use caution.

CAUTION:

If you let your tires spin at high speed, they canexplode, and you or others could be injured. And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehiclecan overheat. That could cause an enginecompartment fire or other damage. When you’restuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’tspin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shownon the speedometer.

NOTICE:

Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of yourvehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheelstoo fast while shifting your transaxle back andforth, you can destroy your transaxle.

For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,see “Tire Chains” in the Index.

Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It OutFirst, turn your steering wheel left and right. That willclear the area around your front wheels. You should turnyour traction control system off. (See “Traction ControlSystem” in the Index.) Then shift back and forthbetween REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning thewheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedalwhile you shift, and press lightly on the acceleratorpedal when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinningyour wheels in the forward and reverse directions, youwill cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle.If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you mayneed to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out,see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.

6-6-1

Section 6 Service and Appearance Care

Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information,and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about yourvehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.

6-2 Service6-3 Fuel6-5 Fuels in Foreign Countries6-5 Filling Your Tank6-8 Filling a Portable Fuel Container6-8 Checking Things Under the Hood6-11 Engine Oil6-16 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter6-19 Automatic Transaxle Fluid6-22 Engine Coolant6-27 Windshield Washer Fluid6-29 Brakes6-33 Battery6-33 Bulb Replacement6-39 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement6-40 Tires6-49 Appearance Care6-49 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle

6-51 Care of Safety Belts6-51 Cleaning Glass Surfaces6-52 Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield

and Wiper Blades6-52 Weatherstrips6-52 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle6-54 Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome-Plated

Wheels (If Equipped)6-54 Cleaning Tires6-54 Sheet Metal Damage6-55 Underbody Maintenance6-55 Chemical Paint Spotting6-56 GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials6-57 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)6-58 Electrical System6-67 Replacement Bulbs6-67 Capacities and Specifications6-68 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

6-2

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you tobe happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer forall your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts andGM-trained and supported service people.

We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Doing Your Own Service WorkIf you want to do some of your own service work, you’llwant to use the proper service manual. It tells you muchmore about how to service your vehicle than this manualcan. To order the proper service manual, see “Serviceand Owner Publications” in the Index.

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see “Servicing Your AirBag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.

You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work youperform. See “Maintenance Record” in the MaintenanceSchedule booklet.

6-3

CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle could bedamaged if you try to do service work on avehicle without knowing enough about it.

� Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacement partsand tools before you attempt any vehiclemaintenance task.

� Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts andother fasteners. “English” and “metric”fasteners can be easily confused. If you usethe wrong fasteners, parts can later breakor fall off. You could be hurt.

Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your VehicleThings you might add to the outside of your vehicle canaffect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noiseand affect windshield washer performance. Check withyour dealer before adding equipment to the outside ofyour vehicle.

FuelUse premium unleaded gasoline rated at 91 octane orhigher for best performance. You may use middle gradeor regular unleaded gasolines, but your vehicle’sacceleration may be slightly reduced.

It is recommended that the gasoline meet specificationswhich have been developed by the AmericanAutomobile Manufacturers Association (AAMA) andendorsed by the Canadian Motor Vehicle ManufacturersAssociation for better vehicle performance and engineprotection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA specificationcould provide improved driveability and emissioncontrol system performance compared to other gasolines.

Be sure the posted octane for premium is at least 91 (at least 87 for regular). If the octane is less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine.

If you’re using fuel rated at the recommended octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engineneeds service. But don’t worry if you hear a littlepinging noise when you’re accelerating or driving up ahill. That’s normal, and you don’t have to buy a higheroctane fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constantknock that means you have a problem.

6-4

If your vehicle is certified to meet California EmissionStandards (indicated on the underhood emission controllabel), it is designed to operate on fuels that meetCalifornia specifications. If such fuels are not availablein states adopting California emissions standards, yourvehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or yourvehicle may fail a smog-check test. (See “MalfunctionIndicator Lamp” in the Index.) If this occurs, return to your authorized Cadillac dealer for diagnosis todetermine the cause of failure. In the event it isdetermined that the cause of the condition is the type offuels used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT); ask your service station operator whether or not the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does notrecommend the use of such gasolines. If fuels containingMMT are used, spark plug life may be reduced and youremission control system performance may be affected.The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrumentpanel may turn on. If this occurs, return to yourauthorized Cadillac dealer for service.

To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United Statesare now required to contain additives that will helpprevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuelsystem, allowing your emission control system tofunction properly. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolinescontaining oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines may be available in your area tocontribute to clean air. General Motors recommends thatyou use these gasolines, particularly if they comply withthe specifications described earlier.

NOTICE:

Your vehicle was not designed for fuel thatcontains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrodemetal parts in your fuel system and also damageplastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’tbe covered under your warranty.

6-5

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard tofind. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel notrecommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered byyour warranty.

To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does business in thecountry where you’ll be driving.

You can also write us at the following address foradvice. Just tell us where you’re going and give yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation1908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Filling Your Tank

CAUTION:

Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burnsviolently, and that can cause very bad injuries.Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refuelingyour vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smokingmaterials away from gasoline.

6-6

The fuel door release islocated above the radio onthe Driver InformationCenter (DIC) and on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

This button works only when the shift lever is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and the VALET lockoutswitch is in the OFF position.

An alternate fuel doorrelease is located inside ofthe trunk on the driver’sside. Pull it to release thefuel door.

To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the left(counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in it; if you letgo of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right.

6-7

CAUTION:

If you get gasoline on yourself and thensomething ignites it, you could be badly burned.Gasoline can spray out on you if you open thefuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happenif your tank is nearly full, and is more likely inhot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly andwait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrewthe cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline frompainted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning theOutside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.

When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sureyou fully install the cap. The diagnostic system candetermine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperlyinstalled. This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index.

The CHECK GAS CAP message will come on if thefuel cap is not properly reinstalled.

NOTICE:

If you need a new cap, be sure to get the righttype. Your dealer can get one for you. If you getthe wrong type, it may not fit properly. This maycause your malfunction indicator lamp to lightand your fuel tank and emissions system may bedamaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” inthe Index.

6-8

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is inyour vehicle. Static electricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the gasoline vapor. You canbe badly burned and your vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:

� Dispense gasoline only into approved containers.

� Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed oron any surface other than the ground.

� Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening before operatingthe nozzle. Contact should be maintaineduntil the filling is complete.

� Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Under the Hood

CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start up andinjure you even when the engine is not running.Keep hands, clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine parts andstart a fire. These include liquids like gasoline,oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer andother fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or otherscould be burned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

6-9

Hood Release

Pull the lever inside thevehicle to open the hood. Itis located on the lower leftside of the instrument panel.

Then go to the front of the vehicle and find thesecondary hood release, which is located under the frontedge of the grille. Lift up on the release lever as youraise the hood.

6-10

When you open the hood, you’ll see:

A. BatteryB. Engine Coolant Fill LocationC. Power Steering FluidD. Engine Oil Fill Location

E. Engine Oil DipstickF. Brake Master CylinderG. Transaxle Dipstick/Fluid

Fill Location

H. Engine Air Cleaner/FilterI. Windshield Washer Fluid

Reservoir

Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.

6-11

Underhood LampTurn the parking lamps on to operate the underhoodlamp. The underhood lamp will come on when the hoodis opened.

Engine OilIf the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears on theinstrument panel, it means you need to check yourengine oil level right away. For more information, seeCHECK OIL LEVEL message in the Index.

You should check your engine oil level regularly; this isan added reminder.

A CHECK OIL LEVEL message will appear when theengine oil is approximately 1 quart (1L) low. If themessage is displayed, check the dipstick level and addoil as needed.

Checking Engine OilIt’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time youget fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil mustbe warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick islocated behind the radiatoron the driver’s side of theengine. The yellow handlesays ENGINE OIL on it.

Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes todrain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstickmight not show the actual level.

Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel orcloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,keeping the tip down, and check the level.

6-12

When to Add Engine OilIf the oil is at or below the ADD line, then you’ll needto add at least one quart of oil. But you must use theright kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. Forcrankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”in the Index.

NOTICE:

Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has somuch oil that the oil level gets above the uppermark that shows the proper operating range,your engine could be damaged.

The engine oil fill cap islocated behind the radiatoron the passenger’s side ofthe engine. Turn the capcounterclockwise to remove it.

Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere inthe proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when you’re through.

6-13

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseOils recommended for your vehicle can be identified bylooking for the starburst symbol.

This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified bythe American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use anyoil which does not carry this starburst symbol.

If you change your own oil,be sure you use oil that hasthe starburst symbol on thefront of the oil container. If you have your oilchanged for you, be sure the oil put into your engineis American PetroleumInstitute certified forgasoline engines.

You should also use the proper viscosity oil for yourvehicle, as shown in the following chart:

6-14

As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for yourvehicle. However, you can use SAE 10W-30 if it’s goingto be 0�F (-18�C) or above. These numbers on an oilcontainer show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not useother viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50.

NOTICE:

Use only engine oil with the American PetroleumInstitute Certified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to use therecommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench� oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle.

If you are in an area where the temperature falls below-20�F (-29�C), consider using either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provideeasier cold starting and better protection for your engineat extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDon’t add anything to your oil. The recommended oilswith the starburst symbol are all you will need for goodperformance and engine protection.

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer that lets you know when tochange your engine oil. This is not based on mileage, buton engine revolutions and engine operating temperature.When the computer has calculated that the oil needschanging, the GM Oil Life System� will indicate that achange is necessary. The mileage between oil and filterchanges will vary depending on how you drive yourvehicle -- usually between 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and10,000 miles (16 000 km) since your last oil and filterchange. Under severe conditions, the system may come onbefore 3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never drive your vehiclemore than 10,000 miles (16 000 km) or 12 months(whichever occurs first) without an oil change.

The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So, if you drivein a dusty area, be sure to change your oil and filterevery 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner. Remember toreset the Oil Life Indicator whenever the oil is changed.

6-15

How to Reset the Oil Life Indicator

After the oil has been changed, display the OIL LIFELEFT message by pressing the SKIP INFO button. Thenpress and hold the NO INFO RESET button until thedisplay shows 100% ENGINE OIL LIFE. This resets theoil life index. The message will remain off until the nextoil change is needed. The percentage of oil liferemaining may be checked at any time by pressing theSKIP INFO button several times until the OIL LIFELEFT message appears. For more information on the OilLife feature, see “Oil Life Indicator” in the Index.

What to Do with Used OilDid you know that used engine oil contains certainelements that may be unhealthy for your skin and couldeven cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skinfor very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap andwater, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throwaway clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use anddisposal of oil products.)

Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oilfrom the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oilby putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. Ifyou have a problem properly disposing of your used oil,ask your dealer, a service station or a local recyclingcenter for help.

6-16

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

The air cleaner is located next to the windshield washerfluid reservoir on the driver’s side of the engine. Be surethe engine has cooled before following these steps toreplace the air cleaner filter:

1. With a screwdriver,loosen the air ductclamp, which is located at the massairflow sensor end of the air duct.

2. Disconnect the air duct from the mass airflow sensor.

6-17

3. Unhook both air cleaner cover latches. One latch islocated near the radiator hose (not shown).

4. Pivot the air cleaner and air duct assembly towardthe front of the vehicle. Remove the cover.

5. Take out the air cleaner filter and remove any loose debris that may be found laying in the air cleaner base.

6. Install a new air filter element. See “NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts” in the Index.

6-18

Follow these steps to reinstall the air cleaner assembly:

1. Slide the air cleaner lid into the slots in the frontedge of the air cleaner base.

2. Pivot the air cleaner cover and the air duct assemblydownward. Make sure that both latches are secureand fully engaged.

3. Reinstall the clean air duct over the mass airflowsensor. Make sure that the duct is secure around theentire outer edge of the sensor.

4. Tighten the air duct clamp.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when toreplace the air filter.

See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in theMaintenance Schedule booklet.

CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filteroff can cause you or others to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame ifthe engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and theengine backfires, you could be burned. Don’tdrive with it off, and be careful working on theengine with the air cleaner/filter off.

NOTICE:

If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get into your engine, which will damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filter in place whenyou’re driving.

6-19

Automatic Transaxle FluidWhen to Check and ChangeA good time to check your automatic transaxle fluidlevel is when the engine oil is changed.

Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:

� In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90�F (32�C) or higher.

� In hilly or mountainous terrain.

� When doing frequent trailer towing.

� Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, the fluid and filter do not require changeuntil the message CHANGE TRANS FLUID appears onthe Driver Information Center.

See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in theMaintenance Schedule booklet.

How to CheckBecause this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.

NOTICE:

Too much or too little fluid can damage yourtransaxle. Too much can mean that some of thefluid could come out and fall on hot engine partsor exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure toget an accurate reading if you check yourtransaxle fluid.

6-20

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxlefluid level if you have been driving:

� When outside temperatures are above 90�F (32�C).

� At high speed for quite a while.

� In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.

� While pulling a trailer.To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normaloperating temperature, which is 180�F to 200�F (82�C to 93�C).Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles (24 km)when outside temperatures are above 50�F (10�C). If it’scolder than 50�F (10�C), you may have to drive longer.

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare your vehicle as follows:� Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the

engine running.� With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever

in PARK (P).� With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift

lever through each gear range, pausing for aboutthree seconds in each range. Then, position the shiftlever in PARK (P).

� Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:

1. The black transaxle fluid cap is located next to theradiator hose and below the air cleaner assembly onthe driver’s side of the engine. Remove the aircleaner assembly so you can reach the transaxle fluidcap. The assembly is attached to the vehicle by twofasteners. Simply lift up on the air cleaner assemblyto remove it. Find the transaxle fluid cap and turn itto the left to remove. Pull out the dipstick and wipe itwith a clean rag or paper towel.

6-21

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds andthen pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in thecross-hatched area.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way. Replace the aircleaner assembly.

How to Add FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whatkind of transaxle fluid to use. See “RecommendedFluids and Lubricants” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the properfluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on the dipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at thedipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.

It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.

NOTICE:

We recommend you use only fluid labeledDEXRON�-III, because fluid with that label ismade especially for your automatic transaxle.Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON�-IIIis not covered by your new vehicle warranty.

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check.”

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push thedipstick back in all the way.

6-22

How to Reset Transaxle Fluid Change IndicatorYour vehicle is equipped with a transaxle fluid changeindicator. A CHANGE TRANS FLUID message willdisplay on the Driver Information Center (DIC) whenthe powertrain computer determines that the transaxlefluid needs to be changed or at each 100,000 miles (160 000 km) interval, whichever occurs first. See yourMaintenance Schedule booklet for more information.When this message appears, change the transaxle fluidand reset the transaxle fluid life indicator as follows:

1. Turn the ignition on but do not start the engine.

2. Press and hold the OFF and rear defog buttons on the climate control system at the same time until theTRANS FLUID RESET message appears on the DIC.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL� engine coolant. This coolant is designedto remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add onlyDEX-COOL� extended life coolant.

The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problemwith engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” inthe Index.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL� coolant will:

� Give freezing protection down to -34�F (-37�C).

� Give boiling protection up to 265�F (129�C).

� Protect against rust and corrosion.

� Help keep the proper engine temperature.

� Let the warning lights and gages work as they should.

6-23

NOTICE:

When adding coolant, it is important that you use only DEX-COOL� (silicate-free) coolant.If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to the system, premature engine, heater core orradiator corrosion may result. In addition, theengine coolant will require change sooner -- at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX-COOL� is notcovered by your new vehicle warranty.

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water andone-half DEX-COOL� coolant which won’t damagealuminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, youdon’t need to add anything else.

CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain water, or some otherliquid like alcohol, can boil before the propercoolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolantwarning system is set for the proper coolantmixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’tget the overheat warning. Your engine couldcatch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable waterand DEX-COOL� coolant.

6-24

NOTICE:

If you use an improper coolant mixture, yourengine could overheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by yourwarranty. Too much water in the mixture canfreeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater coreand other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,have your dealer check your cooling system.

NOTICE:

If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have toadd extra inhibitors or additives which claim toimprove the system. These can be harmful.

Checking Coolant

The surge tank is located next to the engine block on thepassenger’s side of the engine.

The cooling system is under a lot of pressure when it ishot. If the CHECK COOLANT LEVEL messageappears on the Driver Information Center (DIC), youwill need to add coolant.

6-25

CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap when theengine and radiator are hot can allow steam andscalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.Never turn the surge tank pressure cap -- even alittle -- when the engine and radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. When yourengine is cold, the coolant level should be at the fullcold mark, which is 2.5 inches (6.4 cm) below the baseof the fill neck. Use a flashlight as necessary to see intothe tank.

If the CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message comes onand stays on, it means you’re low on engine coolant.

For more information, see “Check Coolant LevelMessage” in the Index.

Adding Coolant

If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL�

coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when theengine is cool.

CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,and it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is hand-tight.

6-26

Surge Tank Pressure Cap

NOTICE:

The surge tank cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa)pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed toprevent coolant loss and possible engine damagefrom overheating. Be sure the arrows on thecap line up.

If the surge tank pressure cap needs to be replaced, aGM cap is recommended.

Power Steering FluidThe power steering fluidreservoir is located next to the coolant surge tank on the passenger’s side of the engine.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check power steeringfluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system oryou hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.

6-27

How to Check Power Steering FluidTurn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, thenunscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then removethe cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. Ifnecessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, see“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in theMaintenance Schedule booklet. Always use the properfluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks anddamage hoses and seals.

Windshield Washer FluidWhat to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to readthe manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will beoperating your vehicle in an area where the temperaturemay fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing.

Adding Washer FluidThe CHECK WASHER FLUID message will bedisplayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the fluid is low.

6-28

The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located next tothe air cleaner on the driver’s side of the engine.

Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY. Addwasher fluid until the tank is full.

NOTICE:

� When using concentrated washer fluid,follow the manufacturer’s instructions foradding water.

� Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution to freezeand damage your washer fluid tank andother parts of the washer system. Also,water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.

� Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it’s very cold. This allows for expansion if freezing occurs,which could damage the tank if it iscompletely full.

� Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

6-29

BrakesBrake Fluid

Your brake master cylinder reservoir is on the driver’sside of the engine compartment. It is filled with DOT-3brake fluid.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in thereservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluidgoes down to an acceptable level during normal brakelining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid levelgoes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking outof the brake system. If it is, you should have your brakesystem fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later yourbrakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all.

So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluidwhen your linings are worn, then you’ll have too muchfluid when you get new brake linings. You should add(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

6-30

CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on theengine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hotenough. You or others could be burned, and yourvehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid onlywhen work is done on the brake hydraulic system.

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brakewarning light will come on. See “Brake System WarningLight” in the Index.

What to Add

When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brakefluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.Refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in theMaintenance Schedule booklet.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the areaaround the cap before removing it. This will help keepdirt from entering the reservoir.

CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brakesystem, your brakes may not work well, or theymay not even work at all. This could cause acrash. Always use the proper brake fluid.

6-31

NOTICE:

� Using the wrong fluid can badly damagebrake system parts. For example, just a fewdrops of mineral-based oil, such as engineoil, in your brake system can damage brakesystem parts so badly that they’ll have to bereplaced. Don’t let someone put in thewrong kind of fluid.

� If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluidon your vehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately. See “Appearance Care” in the Index.

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make ahigh-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are wornand new pads are needed. The sound may come and go orbe heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except whenyou are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).

CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means that soonyour brakes won’t work well. That could lead toan accident. When you hear the brake wearwarning sound, have your vehicle serviced.

6-32

NOTICE:

Continuing to drive with worn -out brake padscould result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brakesqueal when the brakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not mean something is wrong withyour brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspectbrake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in theproper sequence to GM specifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced as completeaxle sets.

See “Brake System Inspection” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet under Part C “Periodic Maintenance Inspections.”

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not return tonormal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedaltravel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or without thevehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its manyparts have to be of top quality and work well together ifthe vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehiclewas designed and tested with top-quality GM brakeparts. When you replace parts of your braking system -- for example, when your brake linings weardown and you have to have new ones put in -- be sureyou get new approved GM replacement parts. If youdon’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. Forexample, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrongfor your vehicle, the balance between your front andrear brakes can change -- for the worse. The brakingperformance you’ve come to expect can change in manyother ways if someone puts in the wrong replacementbrake parts.

6-33

BatteryYour new vehicle comes with a maintenance freeACDelco� battery. When it’s time for a new battery, getone that has the replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco battery.

Vehicle StorageIf you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days ormore, remove the black, negative (-) cable from thebattery. This will help keep your battery from running down.

CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gasthat can explode. You can be badly hurt if youaren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Indexfor tips on working around a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehiclefor longer storage periods.

Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-DeterrentFeature” in the Index.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulb, see“Replacement Bulbs” in the Index.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer’s service department.

Halogen Bulbs

CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside andcan burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sure to read andfollow the instructions on the bulb package.

6-34

Headlamps

1. To access the headlamps, turn the lock tabs in the direction of the arrows as shown on the headlamp cover.

2. Lift off the cover.

3. Turn the headlamp housing socket counterclockwiseto unlock the socket from the lamp housing.

6-35

4. Remove the headlamp housing socket. 5. After removing the wiring harness from theheadlamp housing socket, replace the bulb andsocket. Reconnect it to the wiring harness andreinstall the headlamp housing socket back into theheadlamp assembly.

6-36

Front Turn Signal Lamps1. The turn signal lamps are located on the outboard

side of the headlamps. To access, turn the lock tabson the headlamp cover in the direction of the arrowsand then lift off the cover (see Steps 1 and 2 under“Headlamps” listed previously).

2. Turn the housing socket counterclockwise to unlockthe socket from the lamp housing.

3. Remove the turn signal lamp housing socket andreplace the bulb.

6-37

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)

1. Lift the trim cover to remove.

2. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove thesocket and bulb from the housing.

3. Replace the bulb.

Reverse the steps to reassemble the stoplamp assembly.

6-38

Rear Turn Signal Lamps and Taillamps1. Open the trunk to gain access to the lamp housing.

2. Remove the convenience net and pull the trim awayto access the wing nuts.

3. Remove the two wing nuts.

4. Gently remove the lamp housing.

5. Press the bulb housing lever and turn the housingcounterclockwise to remove it. To remove the bulb,push and turn it counterclockwise.

Once you have replaced the burned-out bulb, reverse thesteps to reassemble the lamp assembly.

6-39

Windshield Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected at leasttwice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper BladeCheck” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet under PartB “Owner Checks and Services” for more information.

It’s a good idea to clean or replace the wiper bladeassembly on a regular basis or when worn. For properwindshield wiper blade length and type, see “NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts” in the Index. To replace the wiper blade assembly:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACCESSORY and turn thewipers on. Position the wipers on the windshield inthe “mid” wipe position. Then with the door open,turn the key to OFF. 2. Insert a screwdriver into the slot as shown and press

down to release the wiper blade assembly.

3. Align the wiper arm pin with the hole on the wiperblade assembly and snap it into place to install.

6-40

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made bya leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questionsabout your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your Cadillac Warranty booklet for details.

CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous.� Overloading your tires can cause

overheating as a result of too much friction.You could have an air-out and a seriousaccident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.



� Underinflated tires pose the same danger asoverloaded tires. The resulting accidentcould cause serious injury. Check all tiresfrequently to maintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressure should be checkedwhen your tires are cold.

� Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured or broken by a suddenimpact -- such as when you hit a pothole.Keep tires at the recommended pressure.

� Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If yourtread is badly worn, or if your tires havebeen damaged, replace them.

See “Inflation -- Tire Pressure” in this section for inflation pressure adjustment for higherspeed driving.

6-41

Inflation -- Tire PressureThe Tire-Loading Information label, which is located onthe rear edge of the driver’s door, shows the correctinflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at leastthree hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

If you’ll be driving at high speeds (e.g., speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher), where it is legal, set the cold inflation pressure to the maximum inflationpressure shown on the tire sidewall, or to 38 psi (265 kPa), whichever is lower. See the example below.When you end this high-speed driving, return to the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire-LoadingInformation label.

Example:

You’ll find maximum load and inflation pressuremolded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near therim flange. It will read something like this: Maximumload 690 kg (1521 lbs.) @ 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.

For this example, you would set the inflation pressurefor high-speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).

NOTICE:

Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation oroverinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tiresdon’t have enough air (underinflation), you canget the following:� Too much flexing� Too much heat� Tire overloading� Bad wear� Bad handling� Bad fuel economy.If your tires have too much air (overinflation),you can get the following:� Unusual wear� Bad handling� Rough ride� Needless damage from road hazards.

6-42

When to Check

Check your tires once a month or more.

Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflatedsimply by looking at them. Radial tires may lookproperly inflated even when they’re underinflated.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles (10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusualwear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and checkwheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires orwheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and“Wheel Replacement” later in this section for more information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The firstrotation is the most important. See “ScheduledMaintenance Services” in the Maintenance Schedulebooklet for scheduled rotation intervals.

When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.

6-43

Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire-LoadingInformation label. Make certain that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.

CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to whichit is fastened, can make wheel nuts become looseafter a time. The wheel could come off and causean accident. When you change a wheel, removeany rust or dirt from places where the wheelattaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off. (See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.)

When It’s Time for New Tires

One way to tell whenit’s time for new tiresis to check thetreadwear indicators,which will appearwhen your tires have only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less oftread remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the following statementsare true:� You can see the indicators at three or more places

around the tire.

� You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber.

� The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deepenough to show cord or fabric.

� The tire has a bump, bulge or split.� The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that

can’t be repaired well because of the size or locationof the damage.

6-44

Buying New TiresTo find out what kind and size of tires you need, look atthe Tire-Loading Information label.

The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new hada Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That wayyour vehicle will continue to have tires that are designedto give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,traction, ride and other things during normal service onyour vehicle. If your tires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”(for mud and snow).

If you ever replace your tires with those not having aTPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose control whiledriving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have a crash.Using tires of different sizes may also causedamage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the samesize and type tires on all wheels.

It’s all right to drive with your compact spare,though. It was developed for use on your vehicle.

CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, thewheel rim flanges could develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel couldfail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-plytires with the wheels on your vehicle.

6-45

Uniform Tire Quality GradingThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration, which grades tires bytreadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)The grades are molded on the sidewalls of mostpassenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Gradingsystem does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snowtires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motors passengercars and light trucks may vary with respect to thesegrades, they must also conform to Federal safetyrequirements and additional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) standards.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based onthe wear rate of the tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and ahalf (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a

tire graded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction -- AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlledconditions on specified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance. Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature -- A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

6-46

The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. GradesB and A represent higher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, orexcessive loading, either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balancedcarefully at the factory to give you the longest tire lifeand best overall performance.

Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear oryour vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignmentmay need to be reset. If you notice your vehiclevibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheelsmay need to be rebalanced.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rustedor corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If thewheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminumwheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the same load-carryingcapacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted thesame way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel boltsor wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM originalequipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have theright wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

6-47

CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel boltsor wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.It could affect the braking and handling of yourvehicle, make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collision in whichyou or others could be injured. Always use thecorrect wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.

NOTICE:

The wrong wheel can also cause problems withbearing life, brake cooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumperheight, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tirechain clearance to the body and chassis.

See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used orhow far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenlyand cause an accident. If you have to replace awheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.

6-48

Tire Chains

NOTICE:

If your vehicle has P235/60R16 size tires, don’tuse tire chains. They can damage your vehiclebecause there’s not enough clearance.

Use another type of traction device only if itsmanufacturer recommends it for use on yourvehicle and tire size combination and roadconditions. Follow that manufacturer’sinstructions. To help avoid damage to yourvehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove thedevice if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’tspin your wheels.

NOTICE: (Continued)

NOTICE: (Continued)

If you do find traction devices that will fit, installthem on the front tires.If you have other tires, use tire chains only wherelegal and only when you must. Use only SAEClass “S” type chains that are the proper size foryour tires. Install them on the front tires andtighten them as tightly as possible with the endssecurely fastened. Drive slowly and follow thechain manufacturer’s instructions. If you canhear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop andretighten them. If the contact continues, slowdown until it stops. Driving too fast or spinningthe wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle.

6-49

Appearance CareRemember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Someare toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike amatch or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some aredangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.When you use anything from a container to clean yourvehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warningsand instructions. And always open your doors orwindows when you’re cleaning the inside.

Never use these to clean your vehicle:

� Gasoline

� Benzene

� Naphtha

� Carbon Tetrachloride

� Acetone

� Paint Thinner

� Turpentine

� Lacquer Thinner

� Nail Polish Remover

They can all be hazardous -- some more than others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.

Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:

� Alcohol

� Laundry Soap

� Bleach

� Reducing Agents

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleUse a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loosedirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaceswith a clean, damp cloth.

6-50

Cleaning of Fabric/CarpetYour dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose InteriorCleaner and Capture Non-Solvent Dry Spot and SoilRemover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will cleannormal spots and stains very well. You can getGM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)

Here are some cleaning tips:

� Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.

� Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.

� Carefully scrape off any excess stain.

� Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn.

� If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean theentire area immediately or it will set.

Cleaning VinylUse warm water and a clean cloth.

� Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. Youmay have to do it more than once.

� Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain ifyou don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth and a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for this product.

Cleaning LeatherUse a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap orsaddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let theleather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.

� For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See yourdealer for this product.

� Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasivecleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.

� Soiled or stained leather should be cleanedimmediately. If dirt is allowed to work into thefinish, it can harm the leather.

6-51

Cleaning the Top of the Instrument PanelUse only mild soap and water to clean the top surfacesof the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones orwaxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Cleaning Interior Plastic ComponentsUse only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect thesurface finish.

Cleaning Wood PanelsUse a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (use mild dish washing soap). Dry the woodimmediately with a clean cloth.

Cleaning Speaker CoversVacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that thespeaker won’t be damaged. Clean spots with just waterand mild soap.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, itmay severely weaken them. In a crash, theymight not be able to provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mild soap andlukewarm water.

Cleaning Glass SurfacesGlass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or aliquid household glass cleaner will remove normaltobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)

Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they maycause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rearwindow, since they may have to be scraped off later. If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rearwindow, an electric defogger element may be damaged.Any temporary license should not be attached across thedefogger grid.

6-52

Cleaning the Outside of theWindshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using the windshieldwasher, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax,sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with GMWindshield Cleaner, Bon Ami� Powder (non-scratchingglass cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. Thewindshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinseit with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper bladesand affect their performance. Clean the blade by wipingvigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshieldwasher solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;replace blades that look worn.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply siliconegrease with a clean cloth at least every six months.

During very cold, damp weather more frequent applicationmay be required. (See “Recommended Fluids andLubricants” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet.)

Cleaning the Outside of Your VehicleThe paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depthof color, gloss retention and durability.

Washing Your VehicleThe best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep itclean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.

Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps orchemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,removing all soap residue completely. You can getGM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agentsshould be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry onthe surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with asoft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoidsurface scratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle.

6-53

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a carwashing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Followinstructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle byhand may be necessary to remove residue from the paintfinish. You can get GM-approved cleaning productsfrom your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials”in the Index.)

Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the coloredbasecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

NOTICE:

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull thefinish or leave swirl marks.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and othersalts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, birddroppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., candamage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on paintedsurfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. Ifnecessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are markedsafe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weatherand chemical fallout that can take their toll over a periodof years. You can help to keep the paint finish lookingnew by keeping your vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.

6-54

Cleaning Aluminum orChrome-Plated Wheels (If Equipped)Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth withmild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A waxmay then be applied.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the paintedsurface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleanerswith acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them becauseyou could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polishon aluminum wheels.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, butavoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff offimmediately after application.

Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car washthat has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. Thesebrushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

Cleaning TiresTo clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.

NOTICE:

When applying a tire dressing always take care towipe off any overspray or splash from all paintedsurfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.Petroleum-based products may damage the paintfinish and tires.

Sheet Metal DamageIf your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repair shopapplies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts will providethe corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.

6-55

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finishshould be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrodequickly and may develop into a major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-upmaterials available from your dealer or other serviceoutlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be correctedin your dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal and dustcontrol can collect on the underbody. If these are notremoved, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on theunderbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mudand other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areasof the frame should be loosened before being flushed.Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can dothis for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. Thisdamage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shapeddiscolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Cadillacwill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,whichever occurs first.

6-56

GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

PART NUMBER SIZE DESCRIPTION USAGE

994954 23 in. x 25 in. Polishing Cloth – Wax Treated Exterior polishing cloth

1050172 16 oz. (0.473 L) Tar and Road Oil Remover Removes tar, road oil and asphalt

1050173 16 oz. (0.473 L) Chrome Cleaner and Polish Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass

1050174 16 oz. (0.473 L) White Sidewall Tire Cleaner Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls

1050214 32 oz. (0.946 L) Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops

1050427 23 oz. (0.680 L) Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints

1052918** 8 oz. (0.237 L) Armor All� Protectant Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas�, plastic,rubber and vinyl

1052925 16 oz. (0.473 L) Multi-Purpose InteriorCleaner

Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels and floor mats

1052929 16 oz. (0.473 L) Wheel Cleaner Spray on and rinse with water

1052930 8 oz. (0.237 L) Capture Dry Spot Remover Attracts, absorbs and removes soils on fabric

12345721 2.5 sq. ft. Synthetic Chamois Shines vehicle without scratching

12345725 12 oz. (0.354 L) Silicone Tire Shine Spray on tire shine

12377964* 16 oz. (0.473 L) Finish Enhancer Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants

12377966* 16 oz. (0.473 L) Cleaner Wax Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish

12377984* 16 oz. (0.473 L) Surface Cleaner Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks

See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet.* For exterior use only.**Not recommended for use on instrument panels.

6-57

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears ona plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on thedriver’s side. You can see it if you look through thewindshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN alsoappears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Partslabels and the certificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. Thiscode will help you identify your engine, specificationsand replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou’ll find this label on the rear wall of the trunk on thepassenger’s side. It’s very helpful if you ever need toorder parts. On this label is:

� your VIN,

� the model designation,

� paint information and

� a list of all production options and special equipment.

Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.

6-58

Electrical SystemAdd-On Electrical Equipment

NOTICE:

Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicleunless you check with your dealer first. Someelectrical equipment can damage your vehicleand the damage wouldn’t be covered by yourwarranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should.

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting toadd anything electrical to your vehicle, see “ServicingYour Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring has an individual fuse which ispowered by a MaxiFuse�. An electrical overload willcause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases toremain off. If this happens, have the headlamp wiringchecked right away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is powered by aMaxiFuse�. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow,etc., the wipers will stop until the motor cools. If theoverload is caused by some electrical problem, be sureto have it fixed.

Power Windows and Other Power OptionsCircuit breakers protect the power windows and otherpower accessories. When the current load is too heavy,the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting thecircuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.

6-59

MaxiFuse�/Relay CenterThe MaxiFuses and relays are located next to the enginecompartment fuse block on the driver’s side of theengine. To access the compartment fuse block, removethe shroud cover. If a MaxiFuse should blow, have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer immediately.

MaxiFuse(8-Way)

Usage

BODY 1 Road Sensing Suspension (RSS) Fuse(ETC Only), Convenience Fuse, BATTFuse, Antenna Fuse, Passenger andDriver Seat Belt Comfort Solenoids,Trunk and Fuel Door ReleaseSolenoids and Relays, DoorLock/Unlock Relays, Damper Relay(ETC Only), Parking Lamp Relay,Right and Left Park Fuse

BODY 2 Defog Relay, Pull-Down Fuse, Rightand Left Heated Seat Fuses, ElectronicLevel Control (ELC) Relay, HeatedMirror Fuse, Heated Backlite Fuse,ELC Circuit Breaker

BODY 3 Controlled Power Relay, ControlledPower Back-Up Relay, Cluster Fuse,Passenger Zone Module (PZM) Fuse,Radio Fuse, RAP Relay, Trunk andFuel Door Release Relay, High-BeamRelay, Comfort Fuse, AMP Fuse(Optional), Right and Left Bose Relay (Optional)

6-60

MaxiFuse(8-Way)

Usage

INADVERT Inadvertent Power Relay, InteriorLamps Fuse, Cigarette Lighter-1 Fuse,Courtesy Lamp Relay

LAMPS Headlamps Fuse/Relay, High/LowBeam Control Relay, Fog Lamp Fuse,DRL Fuse, Hazard Fuse, Mirror Fuse,Inadvertent Power Relay, Right andLeft High-Beam Fuse, Right and LeftLow-Beam Fuse, Stoplamp Fuse, Fog Lamp Relay, DRL Relay

IGN 1 Rear Ignition-1 Relay, Wiper Fuse,Relay Ignition-1 Fuse, SupplementalInflatable Restraint (SIR) Fuse,Accessory Relay

WINDOWS Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Relay

SEATS Horn Relay, Driver and PassengerLumbar In/Out Relays, Driver andPassenger Lumbar Up/Down Relays

MaxiFuse(6-Way)

Usage

BATT 3 Steering Column Ignition Switch

BATT 2 Steering Column Ignition Switch

IGN 1 Front Ignition-1 Relay, Oxygen Sensor 1 and 2 Fuse, Fuel Fuse, CruiseFuse, Fuel Pump Relay

BATT 1 Starter Relay and Solenoid,Park/Reverse Fuse, Park Relay,Powertrain Control Module (PCM)Fuse, AC Compressor Fuse and Relay,Fan Relays, Reverse Relay

BRAKES Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Brake Modulator

COOL FNS Cooling Fan Relays 1 and 3

6-61

PowerDistributionBlock

Usage

DRL Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

HI/LO BEAM High and Low-Beam Headlamps

HORN Horn

FOG LPS Fog Lamps

ACCESSORY Accessories

HEAD LPS Headlamps

Relays

INADVERT POWER RELAY

IGN 1 RELAY

STARTER RELAY

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected fromshort circuits by a combination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires causedby electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If theband is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure youreplace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical sizeand rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have aspare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the sameamperage. Pick some feature of your vehicle that youcan get along without -- like the radio or cigarettelighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.Replace it as soon as you can.

There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: theunderhood fuse block and the rear compartment fuse block.

6-62

Underhood Fuse Block

The underhood fuse block is located next to the aircleaner on the driver’s side of the engine. Lift the coverto gain access.

Fuse Usage

CNR LPS Cornering Lamp Switch, Rightand Left Cornering Lamps

INT LPS Trunk Lamp, Courtesy Lamps,Front Vanity Lamps, Glove BoxLamp, Garage Door Opener,Courtesy Lamp Relay

6-63

Fuse Usage

CIG LTR1 Front and Rear Cigarette Lighters

L HDLP LO Left Low-Beam Headlamp

R HDLP LO Right Low-Beam Headlamp

L HDLP HI Left High-Beam Headlamp

R HDLP HI Right High-Beam Headlamp

FOG Fog Lamp Relay, Right and LeftFog Lamps, Headlamp Switch

HDLPS Headlamp Relay, High/Low-BeamControl Relay, Right and LeftLow/High-Beam Fuses

HAZARD Electronic Flasher Module,Turn/Hazard Switch, Right andLeft Front Turn Lamps, Right andLeft Rear Turn Lamps, Cluster

STOP Stoplamp Switch, CenteredHigh-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL), Turn Hazard Switch,ABS Controller, Stepper MotorCruise Control

Fuse Usage

MIRROR Inadvertent Power Relay, LeftOutside Rearview Mirror Switch,ALDL, Memory Mirror Module,Dimmer Switch, Cluster

DRL Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)Relay, Left and Right Low Beamin DRL Mode

IGN 0 (ENG) Powertrain Control Module (PCM)

CRANK Powertrain Control Module (PCM)

ABS Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS)/Traction Control System

IGN-1 Rear Ignition-1 Relay, Front FogLamp Relay, Controlled PowerBackup Relay, DRL Relay,Canister Vent Solenoid

WIPERS Accessory Relay, Wiper Switch

A/C COMP AC Compressor Relay, Cooling Fan Relays 1, 2, 3,Compressor Clutch

6-64

Fuse Usage

PCM (BAT) PCM

PARK/REV Reverse Relay, Right and LeftBack-Up Lamps, ElectrochromicMirror (in Header), Park Relay,Automatic Transaxle Shift LockControl Switch

ECS Transaxle Shift Solenoids, Air Meter, Canister Purge, PCM,Front Ignition-1 Relay

PCM (IGN) Powertrain Control Module (PCM)

DIS Odd and Even Coil Packs

CRUISE Stepper Motor Cruise Control,Low Refrigerant Pressure CutoffSwitch, Park Relay

Fuse Usage

INJ Injectors 1, 4, 6, 7

INJ Injectors 2, 3, 5, 8

FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump Relay, Fuel Pump

OXY SEN1 Oxygen Sensor Front

OXY SEN2 Catalytic Converter (CAT) Rear Oxygen Sensor, StarterEnable Relay

Relays

A/C COMPRELAY

FUEL PUMPRELAY

6-65

Rear Compartment Fuse Block

The fuse block is located on the front wall of the trunk(behind the rear seat) on the driver’s side. Loosen thefour trunk trim fasteners and pull the trim away from thefuse block to gain access.

Fuse Usage

RLY IGN1 Cluster, Cruise in Stalk, PassengerZone Module (PZM), TorqueConverter Clutch (TCC) Switch

SIR Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)

ELC Electronic Level Control (ELC)Relay, ELC Height Sensor

TURN Electronic Flasher, Turn/Hazard Switch

Fuse Usage

CONSOLE Rear Zone Blower, Right and LeftHeated Seat Switches (Optional)

RSS Road Sensing Suspension (RSS)Module (ETC Only)

IGN 0-BODY PRNDL, PZM, Cluster, AirControl Module (ACM), UpperZone Motor, Lower Zone Motor(Optional), HVAC Solenoids,Climate Control Panel, RearDefog Relay, ELC Relay

COMFORT CD Player, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Controlled Power Relay, Air Control Module (ACM), PZM

AMP (Optional) Right and Left Hand Bose Relay, Right and Left FrontSpeakers (On Door), Right andLeft Rear Speakers

PZM Passenger Zone Module (PZM)

6-66

Fuse Usage

RADIO/PHONE Radio Receiver, Radio InterfaceModule (RIM) (Optional), Phone,RAP Relay, Trunk Release Relay,Fuel Door Release Relay,High/Low-Beam Relay

CLUSTER Steering Wheel Controls, Cluster

ACC PZM, Electrochromic Mirror, Rain Sensor (Optional), Accessory Relay

HTD MIR Right and Left Outside Heated Mirror

HTD SEAT R Passenger Heated Seat Relay (Optional)

HTD SEAT L Driver Heated Seat Relay (Optional)

PULL DOWN Trunk Pull-Down Motor

ANTENNA Power Mast Antenna

RSS Damper Relay (ETC Only)

Fuse Usage

CONVENC Trunk Release Relay, TrunkRelease Solenoid, Fuel DoorRelease Relay, Fuel Filler DoorRelease Solenoid, Door LockRelay, Left and RIght DoorMotors, PZM, Door Unlock Relay

BATT Driver and Passenger Seat LumbarSwitch (Optional), Driver andPassenger Seat Belt ComfortSolenoid, Memory Seat Module (Optional)

RSS Road Sensing Suspension (RSS)Module (ETC Only)

RT PARK Headlamp Switch, Right FrontParking Lamp, Right Front andRear Sidemarker Lamps, RightTurn/Stop/Tail Lamps

LT PARK Left Front and Rear SidemarkerLamps, Left Front Parking Lamp,Left Turn/Stop/Tail Lamps, Rightand Left License Lamps,Underhood Lamp

6-67

Replacement BulbsApplication Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlamps Composite

Inner High Beam 9005. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outer Low Beam 9006. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front Turn Signal 3157 NA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) 1156. . . Rear Turn Signal and Taillamp 2057. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given inEnglish and metric conversions. Please refer to“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in theMaintenance Schedule booklet for more information.

Engine SpecificationsDisplacement 279 cubic inches (4 565 cc). . . . . . . . . Type 4.6 L DOHC V8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIN Engine Code

Eldorado Y. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ETC 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HorsepowerEldorado 275 (bhp) @ 5600 rpm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

205 (kW) @ 5600 rpmETC 300 (bhp) @ 6000 rpm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

224 (kW) @ 6000 rpmTorque

Eldorado 300 (lb-ft) @ 4000 rpm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 (N·m) @ 4000 rpm

ETC 295 (lb-ft) @ 4400 rpm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 (N·m) @ 4400 rpm

Firing Order 1-2-7-3-4-5-6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermostat Starts To Open 177-184�F (81-85�C). .

6-68

Wheel Nut Torque100 lb-ft (140 N·m)

CapacitiesTransaxle (4T80-E) 15.0 quarts (14.2 L). . . . . . . . . . Crankcase (Engine Oil with

Filter Change) 7.5 quarts (7.1 L). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Cooling System 12.5 quarts (11.8 L). . . . . . . . Fuel Tank 19.0 gallons( 71.9 L). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure tofill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Normal MaintenanceReplacement PartsAir Filter Element AC Type A1096C. . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Filter Element AC Type GF-650. . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Oil Filter AC Type PF-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCV Valve AC Type CV-774C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spark Plugs PT16EPR-C13 (GM part 12561466). . .

Gap: 0.050 inches (1.3 mm)Thermostat AC Type 131-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield Wiper Blade

(Pin Type) 22 inches (56.5 cm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle DimensionsWheel Base 108.0 inches (274.3 cm). . . . . . . . . . . . . Length 200.6 inches (509.5 cm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Height 53.6 inches (136.1 cm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Width 75.5 inches (191.8 cm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Tread 60.9 inches (154.6 cm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Tread 60.9 inches (154.6 cm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-7-1

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

Here you will find out how to contact Cadillac if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain servicepublications and how to report any safety defects.

7-2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure7-3 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone

(TTY) Users7-4 Customer Assistance Offices7-5 GM Mobility Program for Persons

with Disabilities7-5 Roadside Service7-7 Roadside Service for the Hearing or

Speech Impaired7-8 Courtesy Transportation7-8 Transportation Options

7-10 Warranty Information7-10 Reporting Safety Defects to the United

States Government7-11 Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government7-11 Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors7-11 Ordering Owner Publications in Canada

7-2

Customer Satisfaction Procedure

Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to yourdealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns with thesales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will beresolved by your dealer’s sales or service departments.Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If yourconcern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member ofdealership management. Normally, concerns can bequickly resolved at that level. If the matter has alreadybeen reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager,contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help, contact the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center, 24 hours a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, contact GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in orderto give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have thefollowing information available to give the CustomerAssistance Representative:

� Vehicle Identification Number (This is availablefrom the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.)

� Dealership name and location

� Vehicle delivery date and present mileage

7-3

When contacting Cadillac, please remember that yourconcern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. Thatis why we suggest you follow Step One first if you havea concern.

STEP THREE -- Both General Motors and your dealerare committed to making sure you are completelysatisfied with your new vehicle. However, if youcontinue to remain unsatisfied after following theprocedure outlined in Steps One and Two, file with theGM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additionalrights you may have. Canadian owners refer to yourWarranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet forinformation on the Canadian Motor Vehicle ArbitrationPlan (CAMVAP).

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court programadministered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus tosettle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or theinterpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Although you are required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing any court action, use ofthe program is free of charge and your case will generallybe heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, you may reject it and proceedwith any other venue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephonenumber or write them at the following address:

BBB Auto LineCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1804

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and the Districtof Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves theright to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinueits participation in this program.

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, orspeech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

7-4

Customer Assistance OfficesCadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free numberfor assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write toCadillac, the letter should be addressed to Cadillac’sCustomer Assistance Center.

United StatesCadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 436004Pontiac, MI 48343-6004

1-800-458-80061-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112

CanadaGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112

All Overseas LocationsGMODC - Customer Communication Centre169-0071908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 905-644-4112Fax: 905-644-4866

Caribbean Numbers1-800-496-9992 (English) Puerto Rico1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) Puerto Rico1-800-751-4135 (English) Dominican Republic1-800-751-4136 (Spanish) Dominican Republic1-800-496-9994 U.S. Virgin Islands1-800-389-0009 Bahamas1-800-534-0122 Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua & B.V.I.

If toll free service is not available in the Caribbean, call Puerto Rico 1-787-763-1315.

7-5

GM Mobility Program for Personswith Disabilities

This program, available toqualified applicants, canreimburse you up to $1,000toward aftermarket driver or passenger adaptiveequipment you may requirefor your vehicle (handcontrols, wheelchair/scooterlifts, etc.).

This program can also provide you with free resourceinformation, such as area driver assessment centers andmobility equipment installers. The program is availablefor a limited period of time from the date of vehiclepurchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or callthe GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. When calling from outside Canada, please dial 1-905-644-3063.All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Service

Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than anauto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillacowner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillacadvisor and, when appropriate, a Cadillac trained dealertechnician who can provide on-site service.

7-6

Each technician travels with a specially equippedservice vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillacparts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.

Cadillac Roadside Service� can be reached by dialing1-800-882-1112, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. This service is provided at no charge for anywarranty-covered situation and for a nominal charge if the Cadillac is no longer under warranty. RoadsideService is available only in the United States and Canada.

Cadillac Owner Privileges�Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner Privileges� at “no charge,” throughout your 2000 Cadillac Warranty Period -- 48 months/ 50,000 miles (80 000 km).

Emergency Road Service is performed on site for thefollowing situations:

� Towing Service

� Battery Jump Starting

� Lock Out Assistance

� Fuel Delivery

� Flat Tire Change (Covers change only)

7-7

� Trip Interruption -- If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental expenses may bereimbursed during the 48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km) warranty period. Items covered arehotel, meals and rental car.

Roadside Service AvailabilityWherever you drive in the United States or Canada, an advisor is available to assist you over the phone. A dealer technician, if available, can travel to yourlocation within a 30 mile (50 km) radius of aparticipating Cadillac dealership. If beyond this radius,we will arrange to have your car towed to the nearestCadillac dealership.

Reaching Roadside ServiceDial the toll-free Roadside Service number:1-800-882-1112. An experienced Roadside Service Advisor will assist you and request thefollowing information:

� A description of the problem

� Name, home address, home telephone number

� Location of your Cadillac and number you arecalling from

� The model year, Vehicle Identification Number(VIN), mileage and date of delivery

Roadside Service for the Hearing or Speech ImpairedRoadside Service is prepared to assist owners who havehearing difficulties or are speech impaired. Cadillac hasinstalled special telecommunication devices called TextTelephone (TTY) in the Roadside Service Center.

Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or aconventional teletypewriter can communicate withCadillac by dialing from the United States or Canada1-800-833-CMCC -- daily, 24 hours.

7-8

Courtesy TransportationCadillac has always exemplified quality and value in itsoffering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participating dealers are proud tooffer Courtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with theBumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation optionsare available when warranty repairs are required. This willreduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.

Plan Ahead When PossibleWhen your vehicle requires warranty service, youshould contact your dealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment and advising yourservice consultant of your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If yourvehicle cannot be scheduled into the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled forservice, unless, of course, the problem is safety-related.If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicleoff for service, you are urged to do so as early in thework day as possible to allow for same day repair.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completed while youwait. However, if you are unable to wait Cadillac helpsminimize your inconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Depending on the circumstances,your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service toget you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership.

Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement

If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum)may be available for the use of public transportationsuch as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative,reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to $10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts.

7-9

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

When your vehicle is unavailable due to warranty repairs,your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesyrental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle youobtained, at actual cost, up to a maximum of $35.00 perday supported by receipts. This requires that you sign andcomplete a rental agreement and meet state, local andrental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements varyand may include minimum age requirements, insurancecoverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuelusage charges and may also be responsible for taxes,levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usagebeyond the completion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as acourtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationCourtesy Transportation is available during theBumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.

Courtesy Transportation is available only atparticipating dealers and all program options, such asshuttle service, may not be available at every dealer.Please contact your dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangementswill be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.

Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during theComplete Vehicle Coverage period of the GeneralMotors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,alternative transportation may be available under theCourtesy Transportation Program. Please consult yourdealer for details.

7-10

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at anytime and to resolve all questions of claim eligibilitypursuant to the terms and conditions described herein atits sole discretion.

Warranty InformationYour vehicle comes with a separate warranty bookletthat contains detailed warranty information.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTSTO THE UNITED STATESGOVERNMENTIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect which couldcause a crash or could cause injury or death, you shouldimmediately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA), in addition tonotifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists ina group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems between you, your dealer orGeneral Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto SafetyHotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of TransportationWashington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from the hotline.

7-11

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTSTO THE CANADIANGOVERNMENTIf you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehiclehas a safety defect, you should immediately notifyTransport Canada, in addition to notifying GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. You may write to:

Transport Canada330 Sparks StreetTower COttawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTSTO GENERAL MOTORSIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notifyus. Please call us at 1-800-458-8006, or write:

Cadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 436004Pontiac, MI 48343-6004

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Ordering Owner Publications in CanadaOwner’s manuals are available for purchase for allcurrent and most past model General Motors vehicles.

The toll-free telephone number for ordering informationin Canada is 1-800-668-5539.

7-12

CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 2000 CADILLAC

SERVICE MANUALSService Manuals have the diagnosis and repair informationon engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,electrical, steering, body, etc.RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00

TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASEUNIT REPAIR MANUALThis manual provides information on unit repair serviceprocedures, adjustments and specifications for the 2000 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00

SERVICE BULLETINSService Bulletins give technical service information neededto knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in thediagnosis and service of your vehicle.

OWNER’S INFORMATIONOwner publications are written directly for Owners andintended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle.

Owner’s Manual.RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00

CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMSService Publications are available for current and pastmodel GM vehicles. To request an order form, pleasespecify year and model name of the vehicle.

PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ONTHE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:

Helm, Incorporated � P.O. Box 07130 � Detroit, MI 48207

OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA–MasterCard–Discover)

2000 CADILLAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION

The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling outthe Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order,

or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)

7-13

PUBLICATION FORMNUMBER

Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow adequate time for postalservice. If further information is needed, write to the address shown below or call1-800-551-4123. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with returninformation within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be appliedagainst the original order.

ORDER TOLL FREE(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)

1-800-551-4123(Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM EST)

FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927

Service Manual

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also thename of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent. Mail completed order form to:

HELM, INCORPORATED � P.O. Box 07130 � Detroit, MI 48207For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.

2000 $120.00

2000 $50.00

2000 $15.00

TOTAL MATERIAL

Michigan Purchasers

U.S. Order Processing $6.00Canadian Postage

GRAND TOTAL

add 6% sales tax

(See Note Below)

GM-CAD-ORD99 *(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residentsare to make checks payable in U.S. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add $11.50 plus theU.S. order processing.

(CUSTOMER’S NAME) (ATTENTION)

(STREET ADDRESS—NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)

(CITY) (ZIP CODE)

DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.

(STATE)

AREA CODE

( )

PCheck or Money Order payable to

Helm, Inc. (USA fundsonly — do not send cash.)

VISA

Discover

AccountNumber:

ExpirationDate mo/yr:

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE

S

ITEM DESCRIPTIONNAME YEAR

VEHICLE MODELQTY. PRICE

EACH*TOTALPRICE2

000

GM

HIP TO

AYMENT

Owner’s Manual

Car & Light TruckTransmission Unit Repair

MasterCard

Check here if your billing address is different from your shipping address shown.

PUBLICATION FORMNUMBER

Owner's Manual,2000 Cadillac Eldorado - General …“General Motors of Canada Limited” for...

Documents

Transcript of Owner's Manual,2000 Cadillac Eldorado - General …“General Motors of Canada Limited” for...